Psychology Wiki
 
Line 68: Line 68:
 
===Papers===
 
===Papers===
   
  +
  +
*Adelinis, J. D., Piazza, C. C., & Goh, H.-L. (2001). Treatment of multiply controlled destructive behavior with food reinforcement: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 34(1) Spr 2001, 97-100.
  +
*Adelson-Bernstein, N., & Sandow, L. (1978). Teaching buttoning to severely/profoundly retarded multihandicapped children: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 13(2) Apr 1978, 178-183.
  +
*Adlem, A., Arco, L., & Ngan, C. (1990). An analysis of independent engagement of persons with profound multiple handicaps: Behaviour Change Vol 7(4) 1990, 185-195.
  +
*Adlem, A., & MacDonald, D. (1992). Covariation of stereotyped behaviour and engagement: Behaviour Change Vol 9(1) 1992, 8-13.
  +
*Agran, M., & Alper, S. (2000). Curriculum and instruction in general education: Implications for service delivery and teacher preparation: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(3) Fal 2000, 167-174.
  +
*Agrotou, A. (1994). Isolation and the multi-handicapped patient: An analysis of the music therapist-patient affects and processes: The Arts in Psychotherapy Vol 21(5) 1994, 359-365.
  +
*Aitken, S. (1988). Computer-aided instruction with the multiply impaired: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 32(4) Aug 1988, 257-263.
  +
*Ammerman, R. T., Lubetsky, M. J., Hersen, M., & Van Hasselt, V. B. (1988). Maltreatment of children and adolescents with multiple handicaps: Five case examples: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 1(2) Jun 1988, 129-139.
  +
*Ammerman, R. T., Van Hasselt, V. B., Hersen, M., McGonigle, J. J., & et al. (1989). Abuse and neglect in psychiatrically hospitalized multihandicapped children: Child Abuse & Neglect Vol 13(3) 1989, 335-343.
  +
*Andrew, A. K. (1989). Meeting the needs of young deaf-blind children and their parents: I: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 15(3) May-Jun 1989, 195-206.
  +
*Antonijevic, M. (1974). The family of a deaf-mute child: Psihijatrija Danas Vol 6(2-3) 1974, 163-169.
  +
*Arain, A., Shihabuddin, B., Niaz, F., Modur, P., Taylor, H., Fakhoury, T., et al. (2006). Epilepsy and the Impact of an Epileptology Clinic for Patients with Mental Retardation and Associated Disabilities in an Institutional Setting: Epilepsia Vol 47(12) Dec 2006, 2052-2057.
  +
*Arthur, M. (2003). Socio-Communicative Variables and Behavior States in Students with Profound and Multiple Disabilities: Descriptive Data from School Settings: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 38(2) Jun 2003, 200-219.
  +
*Arthur, M. (2004). Patterns amongst behavior states, sociocommunicative, and activity variables in educational programs for students with profound and multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 16(2) Jun 2004, 125-149.
  +
*Arthur-Kelly, M., Bochner, S., Center, Y., & Mok, M. (2007). Socio-communicative perspectives on research and evidence-based practice in the education of students with profound and multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 19(3) Jun 2007, 161-176.
  +
*Ashby, M., Lindsay, W. R., Pitcaithly, D., Broxholme, S., & Geelen, N. (1995). Snoezelen: Its effects on concentration and responsiveness in people with profound multiple handicaps: British Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 58(7) Jul 1995, 303-307.
  +
*Bagnato, S. J. (1984). Team congruence in developmental diagnosis and intervention: Comparing clinical judgment and child performance measures: School Psychology Review Vol 13(1) Win 1984, 7-16.
  +
*Bagnato, S. J., & Neisworth, J. T. (1980). The Intervention Efficiency Index: An approach to preschool program accountability: Exceptional Children Vol 46(4) Jan 1980, 264-269.
  +
*Bailey, B. R., & Downing, J. (1994). Using visual accents to enhance attending to communication symbols for students with severe multiple disabilities: RE:view Vol 26(3) Fal 1994, 101-118.
  +
*Bailey, B. R., & Head, D. N. (1993). Providing O&M services to children and youth with severe multiple disabilities: RE:view Vol 25(2) Sum 1993, 57-66.
  +
*Bailey, B. R., & Murray-Branch, J. (1993). Collaborative communication programming: Providing a meaning-based curriculum to students with severe multiple disabilities: Journal of Educational & Psychological Consultation Vol 4(1) 1993, 29-47.
  +
*Bailey, L., & Slee, P. T. (1984). A comparison of play interactions between non-disabled and disabled children and their mothers: A question of style: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 10(1) Mar 1984, 5-10.
  +
*Bailey, R. L., & Angell, M. E. (2005). Improving Feeding Skills and Mealtime Behaviors in Children and Youth with Disabilities: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 40(1) Mar 2005, 80-96.
  +
*Baker, D. J., Fox, J., & Albin, R. W. (1995). Staff support strategies to increase the involvement of individuals with disabilities in meal preparation: Behavioral Interventions Vol 10(4) Oct 1995, 197-210.
  +
*Bartlett, C. H., & O'Grady, D. J. (1976). Negotiating educational programs for children with developmental disorders: Assessment, interpretation, demonstration, support (AIDS): Child Psychiatry & Human Development Vol 7(1) Fal 1976, 43-55.
  +
*Barton, L. E., & Barton, C. L. (1985). An effective and benign treatment of rumination: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 10(3) Fal 1985, 168-171.
  +
*Barton, L. E., Johnson, H. A., & Brulle, A. R. (1986). An evaluation of the effectiveness of an extended year program: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 11(2) Sum 1986, 136-138.
  +
*Barton, L. E., Repp, A. C., & Brulle, A. R. (1985). Reduction of stereotypic behaviours using differential reinforcement procedures and momentary restraint: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 29(1) Mar 1985, 71-79.
  +
*Basilova, T. A. (1988). Organization of education for the blind-deaf children abroad: Defektologiya No 5 1988, 65-70.
  +
*Beail, N. (1985). A comparative study of profoundly multiply handicapped children's scores on the Bayley and the Griffiths developmental scales: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 11(1) Jan-Feb 1985, 31-36.
  +
*Beail, N. (1985). The nature of interactions between nursing staff and profoundly multiply handicapped children: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 11(3) May-Jun 1985, 113-129.
  +
*Beange, H., Gale, L., & Stewart, L. (1995). Project renourish: A dietary intervention to improve nutritional status in people with multiple disabilities: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 20(3) 1995, 165-174.
  +
*Becker, H., Schur, S., & Hammer, E. (1987). Monitoring and tracking clients and helpers: A system for matching disabled students with adult services: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 19(2) Sum 1987, 53-63.
  +
*Beckung, E., Steffenburg, U., & Uvebrant, P. (1997). Motor and sensory dysfunctions in children with mental retardation and epilepsy: Seizure Vol 6(1) Mar 1997, 43-50.
  +
*Behrmann, M. M., & Lahm, L. (1984). Babies and robots: Technology to assist learning of young multiply disabled children: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 45(7-8) Jul-Aug 1984, 194-201.
  +
*Benedict, M. I., White, R. B., Wulff, L. M., & Hall, B. J. (1990). Reported maltreatment in children with multiple disabilities: Child Abuse & Neglect Vol 14(2) 1990, 207-217.
  +
*Benedict, M. I., Wulff, L. M., & White, R. B. (1992). Current parental stress in maltreating and nonmaltreating families of children with multiple disabilities: Child Abuse & Neglect Vol 16(2) 1992, 155-163.
  +
*Bennett, D. L., Gast, D. L., Wolery, M., & Schuster, J. (1986). Time delay and system of least prompts: A comparison in teaching manual sign production: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 21(2) Jun 1986, 117-129.
  +
*Benton, R. B., Permenter, N. A., Baylor, J., & McLelland, P. (1974). Evaluating the work potential of blind multiply handicapped persons for the manufacture of bath perfume: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 68(1) Jan 1974, 20-24.
  +
*Berg, W. K., & Wacker, D. P. (1989). Evaluation of tactile prompts with a student who is deaf, blind, and mentally retarded: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 22(1) Spr 1989, 93-99.
  +
*Berg, W. K., Wacker, D. P., Ebbers, B., Wiggins, B., & et al. (1995). A demonstration of generalization of performance across settings, materials, and motor responses for students with profound mental retardation: Behavior Modification Vol 19(1) Jan 1995, 119-143.
  +
*Bergel, R. R. (1981). Individual assessment procedures for multihandicapped and implementation of a sports program: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 4(3) Sep 1981, 365-378.
  +
*Berry, J. O. (1983). Adlerian family counseling: A strengths approach: Individual Psychology: Journal of Adlerian Theory, Research & Practice Vol 39(4) Dec 1983, 419-424.
  +
*Bertram, B. (2004). Cochlear Implantation for Children with Hearing Loss and Multiple Disabilities: An Evaluation from an Educator's Perspective: Volta Review Vol 104(4) 2004, 349-359.
  +
*Besden, C. (2007). Design and implementation of an orientation and mobility program for a young woman with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 625-627.
  +
*Betts, D. J. (2003). Developing a Projective Drawing Test: Experiences with the face stimulus assessment (FSA): Art Therapy Vol 20(2) 2003, 77-82.
  +
*Billingsley, F. F., & Neel, R. S. (1985). Competing behaviors and their effects on skill generalization and maintenance: Analysis & Intervention in Developmental Disabilities Vol 5(4) 1985, 357-372.
  +
*Blacher, J., & Baker, B. L. (1987). Dry-bed training for nocturnal enuresis in three children with multiple problems: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 16(3) Sep 1987, 240-244.
  +
*Black, D. W., Winokur, G., Bell, S., Nasrallah, A., & et al. (1988). Complicated mania: Comorbidity and immediate outcome in the treatment of mania: Archives of General Psychiatry Vol 45(3) Mar 1988, 232-236.
  +
*Black, J. W., & Meyer, L. H. (1992). But... is it really work? Social validity of employment training for persons with very severe disabilities: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 96(5) Mar 1992, 463-474.
  +
*Block, M. E. (1992). What is appropriate physical education for students with profound disabilities? : Adapted Physical Activity Quarterly Vol 9(3) Jul 1992, 197-213.
  +
*Block, M. E., & Zeman, R. (1996). Including students with disabilities in regular physical education: Effects on nondisabled children: Adapted Physical Activity Quarterly Vol 13(1) Jan 1996, 38-49.
  +
*Bloomberg, K., West, D., & Iacono, T. A. (2003). PICTURE IT: An evaluation of a training program for carers of adults with severe and multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 28(3) Sep 2003, 260-282.
  +
*Blumina, M. G. (1989). Prevalence, origin and some characteristics of clinical manifestations of complex disorders: Defektologiya No 3 1989, 3-10.
  +
*Blyden, A. E. (1989). Survival word acquisition in mentally retarded adolescents with multihandicaps: Effects of color-reversed stimulus materials: The Journal of Special Education Vol 22(4) Win 1989, 493-501.
  +
*Bochner, S. (2007). Review of Enhancing everyday communication for children with disabilities: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 32(3) Sep 2007, 226-227.
  +
*Bolduc, M., Gresset, J., Sanschagrin, S., & Thibodeau, J. (1993). A model for the efficient interdisciplinary assessment of young visually impaired children: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 87(10) Dec 1993, 410-414.
  +
*Bond, D. E. (1984). Aspects of additional impairment and multiple handicaps: AEP (Association of Educational Psychologists) Journal Vol 6(5) Win 1984, 50-61.
  +
*Borgioli, J. A., & Kennedy, C. H. (2003). Transitions Between School and Hospital for Students with Multiple Disabilities: A Survey of Causes, Educational Continuity, and Parental Perceptions: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 28(1) Spr 2003, 1-6.
  +
*Brady, M. P., Martin, S., Williams, R. E., & Burta, M. (1991). The effects of fifth graders' socially directed behavior on motor and social responses of children with severe multiple handicaps: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 12(1) 1991, 1-16.
  +
*Branco, A. U., & de Lemos Mettel, T. P. (1995). Cultural canalization of child-child interactions in preschool: Psicologia: Teoria e Pesquisa Vol 11(1) Jan-Apr 1995, 13-22.
  +
*Brauner, A., & Brauner, F. (1987). Handicapped children discover their own image: Psychologie Medicale Vol 19(9) Sep 1987, 1583-1586.
  +
*Breen, C., Haring, T., Pitts-Conway, V., & Gaylord-Ross, R. (1985). The training and generalization of social interaction during breaktime at two job sites in the natural environment: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 10(1) Spr 1985, 41-50.
  +
*Breslau, N. (1983). The psychological study of chronically ill and disabled children: Are healthy siblings appropriate controls? : Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology Vol 11(3) Sep 1983, 379-391.
  +
*Breslau, N., Weitzman, M., & Messenger, K. (1982). Psychologic functioning of siblings of disabled children: Annual Progress in Child Psychiatry & Child Development 1982, 397-416.
  +
*Britten, N., Morgan, K., Fenwick, P. B., & Britten, H. (1986). Epilepsy and handicap from birth to age 36: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 28(6) Dec 1986, 719-728.
  +
*Brock, M. D. (1976). The problem family: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 2(3) May-Jun 1976, 139-143.
  +
*Brodin, J. (2005). Diversity of aspects on play in children with profound multiple disabilities: Early Child Development and Care Vol 175(7-8) Nov 2005, 635-646.
  +
*Brown, R. I. (1987). Rehabilitation in Australia: A look at someone else's backyard: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 13(3) Sep 1987, 127-132.
  +
*Bruns, J. M., Cram, J. T., & Rogers, G. J. (1979). Impedance and otoscopy screening of multiply handicapped children in school: Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools Vol 10(1) Jan 1979, 54-58.
  +
*Brusca, R. M., Nieminen, G. S., Carter, R., & Repp, A. C. (1989). The relationship of staff contact and activity to the stereotypy of children with multiple disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 14(2) Sum 1989, 127-136.
  +
*Bryan, T. H., & Wheeler, R. A. (1976). Teachers' behaviors in classes for severely retarded-multiply trainable mentally retarded, learning disabled and normal children: Mental Retardation Vol 14(4) Aug 1976, 41-45.
  +
*Buchka, M. (1973). Mental handicap: a multiple handicap: Praxis der Kinderpsychologie und Kinderpsychiatrie Vol 22(5) Jul 1973, 171-174.
  +
*Bullock, A., Dalrymple, G. F., & Danca, J. M. (1975). Communication and the nonverbal, multihandicapped child: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 29(3) Mar 1975, 150-152.
  +
*Burd, L., Fisher, W., & Kerbeshian, J. (1985). Pervasive developmental disorders in multiply disabled children: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 46(9-10) Sep-Oct 1985, 246-249.
  +
*Burke, S. O., Costello, E. A., & Handley-Derry, M. H. (1989). Maternal stress and repeated hospitalizations of children who are physically disabled: Children's Health Care Vol 18(2) Spr 1989, 82-90.
  +
*Burti, L. (1988). Rehabilitation and therapeutic continuity in community efforts: Toward an integration of various approaches to long-term treatment: Psichiatria Generale e dell'Eta Evolutiva Vol 26(Suppl) 1988, 109-114.
  +
*Busse, D. G., Romer, L. T., Fewell, R. R., & Vadasy, P. F. (1985). Employment of deaf-blind rubella students in a subsidized work program: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(2) Feb 1985, 59-64.
  +
*Butterworth, G., & MacPherson, F. (1987). Sensorimotor intelligence in profoundly handicapped children and youth: Fruhforderung interdisziplinar Vol 6(2) 1987, 62-72.
  +
*Calvert, D. R., Reddell, R. C., Jacobs, U., & Baltzer, S. (1972). Experiences with preschool deaf-blind children: Exceptional Children Vol 38(5) Jan 1972, 415-421.
  +
*Cameron, M. J., Luiselli, J. K., McGrath, M., & Carlton, R. (1992). Stimulus control analysis and treatment of noncompliant behavior: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 1992, 141-150.
  +
*Campbell, P. H. (1987). The integrated programming team: An approach for coordinating professionals of various disciplines in programs for students with severe and multiple handicaps: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 12(2) Sum 1987, 107-116.
  +
*Campbell, P. H., McInerney, W. F., & Cooper, M. A. (1984). Therapeutic programming for students with severe handicaps: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 38(9) Sep 1984, 594-602.
  +
*Campbell, P. H., Milbourne, S., Dugan, L. M., & Wilcox, M. J. (2006). A Review of Evidence on Practices for Teaching Young Children to Use Assistive Technology Devices: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 26(1) Spr 2006, 3-13.
  +
*Cangelosi, P. A. (1978). Touch, talk, and travel: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 72(7) Sep 1978, 284-286.
  +
*Carnaby, S. (2007). Developing good practice in the clinical assessment of people with profound intellectual disabilities and multiple impairment: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 88-96.
  +
*Caro, P., & Snell, M. E. (1989). Characteristics of teaching communication to people with moderate and severe disabilities: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 24(1) Mar 1989, 63-77.
  +
*Carsrud, A. L., & et al. (1979). Effects of social and environmental change on institutionalized mentally retarded persons: The relocation syndrome reconsidered: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 84(3) Nov 1979, 266-272.
  +
*Carter, M., & Grunsell, J. (2001). The behavior chain interruption strategy: A review of research and discussion of future directions: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 26(1) Spr 2001, 37-49.
  +
*Casey, G. A., Hunt, H. M., Paddon, A. C., & Wilcock, P. M. (1983). Paired associates: A workshop model for effecting change: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 9(3) May-Jun 1983, 137-144.
  +
*Cass, H., Price, K., Reilly, S., Wisbeach, A., & McConachie, H. (1999). A model for the assessment and management of children with multiple disabilities: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 25(3) May 1999, 191-211.
  +
*Chen, S.-C., Tang, F.-T., Chen, Y.-L., Chen, W.-L., Li, Y.-C., Shih, Y.-Y., et al. (2004). Infrared-based communication augmentation system for people with multiple disabilities: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 26(18) Sep 2004, 1105-1109.
  +
*Chess, S. (1987). Psychosocial problems and coping strategies of multihandicapped children and their families. Orlando, FL, England: Grune & Stratton, Inc/Harcourt, Bra.
  +
*Cipolotti, L., Robinson, G., Blair, J., & Frith, U. (1999). Fractionation of visual memory: Evidence from a case with multiple neurodevelopmental impairments: Neuropsychologia Vol 37(4) Apr 1999, 455-465.
  +
*Cole, A. J. (2002). Evaluation and treatment of epilepsy in multiply handicapped individuals: Epilepsy & Behavior Vol 3(6) Dec 2002, S2-S6.
  +
*Collins, B. C., Gast, D. L., Wolery, M., Holcombe, A., & et al. (1991). Using constant time delay to teach self-feeding to young students with severe/profound handicaps: Evidence of limited effectiveness: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 3(2) Jun 1991, 157-179.
  +
*Coninx, F. (1995). Aural rehabilitation issues with multiply handicapped hearing-impaired children: Scandinavian Audiology Supplement Vol 24(Suppl 40) 1995, 61-65.
  +
*Cook, R. (1974). Sex education program service model for the multihandicapped adult: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 35(9) Sep 1974, 264-267.
  +
*Copley, J., & Ziviani, J. (2004). Barriers to the use of assistive technology for children with multiple disabilities: Occupational Therapy International Vol 11(4) 2004, 229-243.
  +
*Copley, J., & Ziviani, J. (2005). Assistive Technology Assessment and Planning for Children with Multiple Disabilities in Educational Settings: British Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 68(12) Dec 2005, 559-566.
  +
*Cotten, P. D., & Wade, J. P. (1984). A demonstration work activities center for multiply handicapped, visually impaired persons: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 78(7) Sep 1984, 303-306.
  +
*Crawford, J. D. (1987). Individual psychotherapy with the nonvocal patient: A unique application of communication devices: Rehabilitation Psychology Vol 32(2) Sum 1987, 93-98.
  +
*Crawford, M. R., & Schuster, J. W. (1993). Using microswitches to teach toy use: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 5(4) Dec 1993, 349-368.
  +
*Crews, J. E., Frey, W. D., & Peterson, P. E. (1987). Independent living for the handicapped elderly community: A national view: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 81(7) Sep 1987, 305-308.
  +
*Crowe, T. K., VanLeit, B., & Berghmans, K. K. (2000). Mothers' perceptions of child care assistance: The impact of a child's disability: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 54(1) Jan-Feb 2000, 52-58.
  +
*Crowe, T. K., VanLeit, B., Berghmans, K. K., & Mann, P. (1997). Role perceptions of mothers with young children: The impact of a child's disability: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 51(8) Sep 1997, 651-661.
  +
*Curtis, W. S., Donlon, E. T., & Tweedie, D. (1974). Communicative behavior of deaf-blind children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 6(4) Dec 1974, 114-118.
  +
*Curtis, W. S., Donlon, E. T., & Tweedie, D. (1975). Learning behavior of deaf-blind children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 7(2) May 1975, 40-48.
  +
*Danella, E. A. (1973). A study of tactile preference in multiply-handicapped children: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 27(8) Nov 1973, 457-463.
  +
*Dano, C., & Lopez, E. (1971). Investigation of 200 cases of request for placement in specialized residential accommodation drawn from consultations at the Committee for the Study & Care of Severely Retarded (CESAP): Revue de Neuropsychiatrie Infantile et d'Hygiene Mentale de l'Enfance Vol 19(3-4) Mar 1971, 151-158.
  +
*Dauterman, W. L. (1972). Manual for the Stanford Multi-Modality Imagery Test. New York, NY: American Foundation for the Blind.
  +
*Davey, B. J., & Lignugaris/Kraft, B. (2005). A practical approach to functional behavioral assessment in a public (state supported) school: Successes and limitations: Emotional & Behavioural Difficulties Vol 10(4) Dec 2005, 255-268.
  +
*David, A. C., & Donovan, E. H. (1975). Initiating group process with parents of multihandicapped children: Social Work in Health Care Vol 1(2) Win 1975-1976, 177-183.
  +
*Davis, H., & Rushton, R. (1991). Counselling and supporting parents of children with developmental delay: A research evaluation: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 35(2) Apr 1991, 89-112.
  +
*Davis, P. K., Young, A., Cherry, H., Dahman, D., & Rehfeldt, R. A. (2004). Increasing the happiness of individuals with profound multiple disabilities: Replication and extension: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 37(4) Win 2004, 531-534.
  +
*de Geeter, K. I., Poppes, P., & Vlaskamp, C. (2002). Parents as experts: The position of parents of children with profound multiple disabilities: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 28(6) Nov 2002, 443-453.
  +
*de Moor, J. M. H., Didden, R., Reinders, A. J. M., & Seys, D. M. (2002). Behavioral treatment of a multiply handicapped child who refused food. A single case study: Kindheit und Entwicklung Vol 11(4) 2002, 247-253.
  +
*Demb, H. B., & Noskin, O. (2001). The use of the term Multiple Complex Developmental Disorder in a diagnostic clinic serving young children with developmental disabilities: A report of 15 cases: Mental Health Aspects of Developmental Disabilities Vol 4(2) Apr-Jun 2001, 4960.
  +
*Demchak, M. (1989). A comparison of graduated guidance and increasing assistance in teaching adults with severe handicaps leisure skills: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 24(1) Mar 1989, 45-55.
  +
*Denoisay, M., & Montaclair, B. (1982). The child in relationship with the psychotherapist, the child in relationship with the speech therapist: Pratique des Mots No 38 Mar 1982, 5-8.
  +
*Descalzo, A., & Masanes, P. (1985). Study of the action of tiapride on self-mutilation behaviors in mentally deficient children: Neuropsychiatrie de l'Enfance et de l'Adolescence Vol 33(4-5) Apr-May 1985, 191-195.
  +
*Dessibourg, C.-A. (2005). Mental deficiency and polyhandicap: new challenges: Schweizer Archiv fur Neurologie und Psychiatrie Vol 156(2) Feb 2005, 75-79.
  +
*DeToledo, J. C., Lowe, M. R., & Haddad, H. (2002). Behaviors mimicking seizures in institutionalized individuals with multiple disabilities and epilepsy: A video-EEG study: Epilepsy & Behavior Vol 3(3,Pt1) Jun 2002, 242-244.
  +
*Dibble, F. B. (1984). Focus on the hands: A beginning approach to teaching typing to visually impaired, multiply handicapped students: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 78(8) Oct 1984, 345-349.
  +
*Dibenedetto, T. A. (1976). Problems of the deaf-retarded: A review of the literature: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 11(2) Apr 1976, 164-171.
  +
*DiCarlo, C. F., Reid, D. H., & Stricklin, S. B. (2003). Increasing toy play among toddlers with multiple disabilities in an inclusive classroom: A more-to-less, child-directed intervention continuum: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 24(3) May-Jun 2003, 195-209.
  +
*Diebold, M. H., Curtis, W. S., & DuBose, R. F. (1978). Developmental scales versus observational measures for deaf-blind children: Exceptional Children Vol 44(4) Jan 1978, 275-278.
  +
*Dimond, R. E., & Hirt, M. (1974). Investigation of the generalizability of attitudes toward body products as a function of psychopathology and long-term hospitalization: Journal of Clinical Psychology Vol 30(3) Jul 1974, 251-252.
  +
*Downing, J. (1988). Active versus passive programming: A critique of IEP objectives for students with the most severe disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 13(3) Fal 1988, 197-201.
  +
*Downing, J., & Bailey, B. (1990). Developing vision use within functional daily activities for students with visual and multiple disabilities: RE:view Vol 21(4) Win 1990, 209-220.
  +
*Downing, J., & Eichinger, J. (1990). Instructional strategies for learners with dual sensory impairments in integrated settings: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 15(2) Sum 1990, 98-105.
  +
*Downing, J. E. (2001). Meeting the communication needs of students with severe and multiple disabilities in general education classrooms: Exceptionality Vol 9(3) 2001, 147-156.
  +
*Downing, J. E., & Siegel-Causey, E. (1988). Enhancing the nonsymbolic communicative behavior of children with multiple impairments: Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools Vol 19(4) Oct 1988, 338-348.
  +
*Dreger, R. M. (1976). HEED's Need: Follow-up: PsycCRITIQUES Vol 21 (8), Aug, 1976.
  +
*DuBose, R. F. (1977). Predictive value of infant intelligence scales with multiply handicapped children: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 81(4) Jan 1977, 388-390.
  +
*Dunlap, G., Kern-Dunlap, L., Clarke, S., & Robbins, F. R. (1991). Functional assessment, curricular revision, and severe behavior problems: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 24(2) Sum 1991, 387-397.
  +
*Dunnett, J. (1990). A visual assessment of a young multiply handicapped girl and an associated teaching programme: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 16(6) Nov-Dec 1990, 355-363.
  +
*Dunst, C. J., Cushing, P. J., & Vance, S. D. (1985). Response-contingent learning in profoundly handicapped infants: A social systems perspective: Analysis & Intervention in Developmental Disabilities Vol 5(1-2) 1985, 33-47.
  +
*Duquenne, V. (1996). Lattice analysis and the representation of handicap associations: Social Networks Vol 18(3) Jul 1996, 217-230.
  +
*Dura, J. R. (1991). Controlling extremely dangerous aggressive outbursts when functional analysis fails: Psychological Reports Vol 69(2) Oct 1991, 451-459.
  +
*Dura, J. R., Aman, M. G., & Mulick, J. A. (1988). Medication use in an ICF/MR for nonambulatory severely and profoundly mentally retarded children: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 1(3) Sep 1988, 155-160.
  +
*Dura, J. R., Mulick, J. A., Hammer, D., & Myers, E. G. (1990). Establishing independent microcomputer use in people with multiple handicaps, profound mental retardation, and a history of learning failure: Computers in Human Behavior Vol 6(2) 1990, 177-183.
  +
*Durand, V. M., & Kishi, G. (1987). Reducing severe behavior problems among persons with dual sensory impairments: An evaluation of a technical assistance model: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 12(1) Spr 1987, 2-10.
  +
*Durando, J. (2008). A survey on literacy instruction for students with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 102(1) Jan 2008, 40-45.
  +
*Durbach, M., & Pence, A. R. (1991). A comparison of language production skills of preschoolers with special needs in segregated and integrated settings: Early Child Development and Care Vol 68 Mar 1991, 49-69.
  +
*D'Zamko, M. E., & Hampton, I. (1985). Personnel preparation for multihandicapped hearing-impaired students: A review of the literature: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 130(1) Mar 1985, 9-14.
  +
*Eda, Y., Shinohara, A., & Sakai, T. (2002). SpO-sub-2 as an index to evaluate appropriate mealtime length for a student with severe and multiple disabilities: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 39(6) Mar 2002, 131-141.
  +
*Edebol-Tysk, K. (1989). Evaluation of care-load for individuals with spastic tetraplegia: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 31(6) Dec 1989, 737-745.
  +
*Einam, M., & Cuskelly, M. (2002). Paid employment of mothers and fathers of an adult child with multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 46(2) Feb 2002, 158-167.
  +
*Elder, P. S., & Bergman, J. S. (1978). Visual Symbol Communication Instruction with nonverbal, multiply-handicapped individuals: Mental Retardation Vol 16(2) Apr 1978, 107-112.
  +
*Elliott, R., Powers, A., & Funderburg, R. (1988). Learning disabled hearing-impaired students: Teacher survey: Volta Review Vol 90(6) Oct-Nov 1988, 277-286.
  +
*Empey, L. J. (1977). Clinical group work with multi-handicapped adolescents: Social Casework Vol 58(10) Dec 1977, 593-599.
  +
*Endo, S. i. (1992). An approach aimed at encouraging expression of ideation by severely and multiply handicapped children: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 29(4) Mar 1992, 21-25.
  +
*Erhardt, R. P. (1987). Visual function in the student with multiple handicaps: An integrative transdisciplinary model for assessment and intervention: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 19(3) Fal 1987, 87-98.
  +
*Erhardt, R. P., Beatty, P. A., & Hertsgaard, D. M. (1988). A developmental visual assessment for children with multiple handicaps: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 7(4) Win 1988, 84-101.
  +
*Erin, J. (2006). Children with Multiple and Visual Disabilities. Bethesda, MD: Woodbine House.
  +
*Erwin, E. J., & Guintini, M. (2000). Inclusion and classroom membership in early childhood: International Journal of Disability, Development and Education Vol 47(3) Sep 2000, 237-257.
  +
*Fabry, P. L., & Reid, D. H. (1978). Teaching foster grandparents to train severely handicapped persons: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 11(1) Spr 1978, 111-123.
  +
*Facon, B. (1996). The use of switches to promote leisure in multiply handicapped persons: A possible and necessary priority: Revue Francophone de la Deficience Intellectuelle Vol 7(2) Dec 1996, 101-112.
  +
*Facon, B., & Darge, T. M. (1996). Evaluation of toy variation on engagement in a leisure activity of two children with profound multiple handicaps: Psychological Reports Vol 79(1) Aug 1996, 203-210.
  +
*Factor, D. C. (1987). Social skills training with multihandicapped youth: An introduction: Journal of Child Care Vol 3(1) 1987, 9-14.
  +
*Fagan, S., Gray, K., & Factor, D. C. (1987). Foxx's "Stack the Deck": Teaching social skills to mentally handicapped adolescents: Journal of Child Care Vol 3(1) 1987, 29-34.
  +
*Farley, R. C., Means, B. L., Akridge, R. L., & Rice, B. D. (1986). Psychoeducational training with high-risk rehabilitation clients in a field office setting: A pilot study: Journal of Applied Rehabilitation Counseling Vol 17(2) Sum 1986, 25-28.
  +
*Favel, P. (1982). Coeducation in an institution for epileptic adults: Genitif Vol 4(8) 1982, 22-29.
  +
*Fehr, A., & Beckwith, B. E. (1989). Water misting: Treating self-injurious behavior in a multiply handicapped, visually impaired child: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 83(5) May 1989, 245-248.
  +
*Fenn, G., & Rowe, J. A. (1975). An experiment in manual communication: British Journal of Disorders of Communication Vol 10(1) Apr 1975, 3-16.
  +
*Ferguson, D. L., & Ferguson, P. M. (1986). The new victors: A progressive policy analysis of work reform for people with very severe handicaps: Mental Retardation Vol 24(6) Dec 1986, 331-338.
  +
*Ferri, B. A. (2005). Review of Women With Visible and Invisible Disabilities: Multiple Intersections, Multiple Issues, Multiple Therapies: Mental Retardation Vol 43(5) Oct 2005, 376-377.
  +
*Fewell, R. R., & Rich, J. S. (1987). Play assessment as a procedure for examining cognitive, communication, and social skills in multihandicapped children: Journal of Psychoeducational Assessment Vol 5(2) Jun 1987, 107-118.
  +
*Fink, W. T., & Sandall, S. R. (1980). A comparison of one-to-one and small group instructional strategies with developmentally disabled preschoolers: Mental Retardation Vol 18(1) Feb 1980, 34-35.
  +
*Finkle, L. J., Hanson, D. P., & Hostetler, S. K. (1983). The assessment of profoundly handicapped children: School Psychology Review Vol 12(1) Win 1983, 75-81.
  +
*Fisher, D. (2005). Review of Educating Children With Multiple Disabilities: A Collaborative Approach (4th ed.): Mental Retardation Vol 43(1) Feb 2005, 66-67.
  +
*Fisher, W., Burd, L., & Kerbeshian, J. (1985). Integrating developmental, pharmacologic, and psychological diagnoses and management through the transdisciplinary team process: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 46(9-10) Sep-Oct 1985, 268-271.
  +
*Fisher, W., Burd, L., Kuna, D. P., & Berg, D. J. (1985). Attention deficit disorders and the hyperactivities in multiply disabled children: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 46(9-10) Sep-Oct 1985, 250-254.
  +
*Fitz-Gerald, D., & Fitz-Gerald, M. (1979). Sexual implications of deaf-blindness: Sexuality and Disability Vol 2(3) Fal 1979, 212-215.
  +
*Fjermedal, O., & Laukli, E. (1989). Paediatric auditory brainstem response and pure-tone audiometry: Threshold comparisons: A study of 142 difficult-to-test children: Scandinavian Audiology Vol 18(2) 1989, 105-111.
  +
*Flexer, C., & Gans, D. P. (1985). Comparative evaluation of the auditory responsiveness of normal infants and profoundly multihandicapped children: Journal of Speech & Hearing Research Vol 28(2) Jun 1985, 163-168.
  +
*Flexer, C., & Gans, D. P. (1986). Distribution of auditory response behaviors in normal infants and profoundly multihandicapped children: Journal of Speech & Hearing Research Vol 29(3) Sep 1986, 425-429.
  +
  +
*Flynn, R. J., & Salomone, P. R. (1977). Performance of the MMPI in predicting rehabilitation outcome: A discriminant analysis, double cross-validation assessment: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 38(1) Jan 1977, 12-15.
  +
*Foreman, P., Arthur-Kelly, M., Pascoe, S., & King, B. S. (2004). Evaluating the Educational Experiences of Students With Profound and Multiple Disabilities in Inclusive and Segregated Classroom Settings: An Australian Perspective: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 29(3) Fal 2004, 183-193.
  +
*French, L. (1992). Work acclimation of multihandicapped sensory impaired in the school production workshop: Vocational Evaluation & Work Adjustment Bulletin Vol 25(3) Fal 1992, 77-78.
  +
*Frenette, L., & Normand-Guerette, D. (1992). Training needs of teachers working with profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped children: Revue Francophone de la Deficience Intellectuelle Vol 3(2) Dec 1992, 133-144.
  +
*Friedlander, B. Z., Silva, D. A., & Knight, M. S. (1973). Selective responses to auditory and auditory-vibratory stimuli by severely retarded deaf-blind children: Journal of Auditory Research Vol 13(2) Apr 1973, 105-111.
  +
*Fujimoto, B. (1974). Concerning an educational system that assures the development of severely handicapped children: Japanese Journal of Child Psychiatry Vol 15(2) Mar-Apr 1974, 96-102.
  +
*Furman, L. M. (1989). Institutionalized disabled adolescents: Gynecologic care: The pediatrician's role: Clinical Pediatrics Vol 28(4) Apr 1989, 163-170.
  +
*Gable, R. A., Hendrickson, J. M., & Young, C. C. (1984). Teacher behavior in classes for the mentally retarded and multiply handicapped: A comparative analysis: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 19(1) Feb 1984, 54-63.
  +
*Gallagher, P. A., & Heim, R. E. (1974). The classroom application of behavior modification principles for multiple handicapped blind students: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 68(10) Dec 1974, 447-453.
  +
*Gallagher, R. J., Jens, K. G., & O'Donnell, K. J. (1983). The effect of physical status on the affective expression of handicapped infants: Infant Behavior & Development Vol 6(1) Jan 1983, 73-77.
  +
*Gans, D. P., & Flexer, C. (1983). Auditory response behavior of severely and profoundly multiply handicapped children: Journal of Auditory Research Vol 23(2) Apr 1983, 137-148.
  +
*Gardner, J. M., & Breuer, A. (1985). Using microcomputers in the evaluation, training, and management of persons with developmental disabilities: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 11(3) Sep 1985, 129-134.
  +
*Gardner, L., Morse, A. R., Tulloch, D., & Trief, E. (1986). Visual impairment among children from birth to age five: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 80(1) Jan 1986, 535-537.
  +
*Garner, D., Becker, H., Schur, S., & Hammer, E. (1991). An innovative program for multihandicapped deaf students using the FSSI: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 136(3) Jul 1991, 265-269.
  +
*Gast, D. L., Jacobs, H. A., Logan, K. R., Murray, A. S., Holloway, A., & Long, L. (2000). Pre-session assessment of preferences for students with profound multiple disabilities: Education & Training in Mental Retardation & Developmental Disabilities Vol 35(4) Dec 2000, 393-405.
  +
*Gates, C. F. (1985). Survey of multiply handicapped visually impaired children in the Rocky Mountain/Great Plains region: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(9) Nov 1985, 385-391.
  +
*Gates, C. F., & Kappan, D. I. (1985). Teacher preparation in the education of visually impaired children: A multi-competency approach: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(7) Sep 1985, 306-307.
  +
*Gayda, M., & Saleh, D. (2002). Central and peripheral deafness for autistic and deaf children: Annales Medico-Psychologiques Vol 160(9) Nov 2002, 671-676.
  +
*Gee, K., Graham, N., Goetz, L., Oshima, G., & et al. (1991). Teaching students to request the continuation of routine activities by using time delay and decreasing physical assistance in the context of chain interruption: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 16(3) Fal 1991, 154-167.
  +
*Gee, K., Graham, N., Sailor, W., & Goetz, L. (1995). Use of integrated, general education, and community settings as primary contexts for skill instruction for students with severe, multiple disabilities: Behavior Modification Vol 19(1) Jan 1995, 33-58.
  +
*Geekie, K. M., & Brown, H. P. (1995). Treating substance abuse in the multidisabled: An overview: Alcoholism Treatment Quarterly Vol 12(3) 1995, 87-95.
  +
*Geiger, W. L., Bradley, R. H., Rock, S. L., & Croce, R. (1986). "Delivery of therapeutic services in special education programs for learners with severe handicaps": Commentary: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 6(2) Sum 1986, 16-21.
  +
*Gellhaus, M. M., & Olson, M. R. (1993). Using color and contrast to modify the educational environment of visually impaired students with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 87(1) Jan 1993, 19-20.
  +
*Geruschat, D. R. (1992). Using the Acuity Card Procedure to assess visual acuity in children with severe and multiple impairments: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 86(1) Jan 1992, 25-27.
  +
*Gevelinger, M., Ottenbacher, K. J., & Tiffany, T. (1988). The reliability of the Motor Development Checklist: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 42(2) Feb 1988, 81-86.
  +
*Giangreco, M. F. (1986). Delivery of therapeutic services in special education programs for learners with severe handicaps: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 6(2) Sum 1986, 3570.
  +
*Giangreco, M. F. (1986). "Delivery of therapeutic services in special education programs for learners with severe handicaps": Reply: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 6(2) Sum 1986, 22-25.
  +
*Giangreco, M. F. (1986). Effects of integrated therapy: A pilot study: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 11(3) Fal 1986, 205-208.
  +
*Giangreco, M. F. (1987). A Curriculum for Profoundly Handicapped Students: A critique: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 7(3) Fal 1987, 75-83.
  +
*Giangreco, M. F., Cloninger, C. J., Dennis, R. E., & Edelman, S. W. (1993). National expert validation of COACH: Congruence with exemplary practice and suggestions for improvement: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 18(2) Sum 1993, 109-120.
  +
*Giangreco, M. F., Cloninger, C. J., Mueller, P. H., Yuan, S., & et al. (1991). Perspectives of parents whose children have dual sensory impairments: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 16(1) Spr 1991, 14-24.
  +
*Giangreco, M. F., Dennis, R. E., Edelman, S. W., & Cloninger, C. J. (1994). Dressing your IEPs for the general education climate: Analysis of IEP goals and objectives for students with multiple disabilities: Remedial and Special Education Vol 15(5) Sep 1994, 288-296.
  +
*Gibson, D., & Rogers, T. B. (1986). Stability of performance profiles for the developmentally handicapped in open job and community placement: Mental Retardation & Learning Disability Bulletin Vol 14(1) 1986, 35-43.
  +
*Gleason, J. J. (1993). The creation of meaning: What persons with severe or profound multiple developmental disabilities do in context: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 18(3) 1993, 157-167.
  +
*Glenn, S. M. (1983). The application of an automated system for the assessment of profoundly mentally handicapped children: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 6(3) Sep 1983, 358-360.
  +
*Glenn, S. M., & Cunningham, C. C. (1984). Nursery rhymes and early language acquisition by mentally handicapped children: Exceptional Children Vol 51(1) Sep 1984, 72-74.
  +
*Glenn, S. M., & Cunningham, C. C. (1984). Selective auditory preferences and the use of automated equipment by severely, profoundly and multiply handicapped children: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 28(4) Dec 1984, 281-296.
  +
*Gleser, J. M., Margulies, J. Y., Nyska, M., Porat, S., & et al. (1992). Physical and psychosocial benefits of modified Judo practice for blind, mentally retarded children: A pilot study: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 74(3, Pt 1) Jun 1992, 915-925.
  +
*Glick, P. S., Guyer, B., Burr, B. H., & Gorbach, I. E. (1983). Pediatric nursing homes: Implications of the Massachusetts experience for residential care of multiply handicapped children: New England Journal of Medicine Vol 309(11) Sep 1983, 640-646.
  +
*Gnadt, G. R., & Wesson, M. D. (1992). A survey of the vision assessment of the developmentally disabled and multi-handicapped in University Affiliated Programs (UAPs): Journal of the American Optometric Association Vol 63(9) Sep 1992, 619-625.
  +
*Goldblatt, M., & Steisel, I. M. (1973). Behavior modification with multi-handicapped blind children: Proceedings of the Annual Convention of the American Psychological Association 1973, 809-810.
  +
*Goldfine, P. E., Sapakoff, G. A., Berman, H. J., & Smith, R. M. (1984). A treatment model for multi-handicapped children with severe psychiatric illness and deafness: Journal of Child & Adolescent Psychotherapy Vol 1(2) Sep 1984, 111-114.
  +
*Goode, D. A. (1984). Presentation practices of a family with a deaf-blind, retarded daughter: Family Relations Vol 33(1) Jan 1984, 173-185.
  +
*Goode, D. A., & Gaddy, M. R. (1976). Ascertaining choice with alingual, deaf-blind and retarded clients: Mental Retardation Vol 14(6) Dec 1976, 10-12.
  +
*Gralewicz, A. (1973). Play deprivation in multihandicapped children: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 27(2) Mar 1973, 70-72.
  +
*Granlund, M., Olsson, C., von Dardel, T., & Andersson, M. (1990). Parents, group-home staff and school staff working together around children with profound multiple disabilities: British Journal of Mental Subnormality Vol 36(70, Pt 1) Jan 1990, 37-52.
  +
*Granlund, M., Steensson, A.-L., Sundin, M., & Olsson, C. (1992). Inservice training in collaborative problem solving and goal setting for special education teacher consultants working with profoundly impaired persons: British Journal of Mental Subnormality Vol 38(2)[75] Jul 1992, 94-113.
  +
*Granlund, M., & Wilder, J. (2006). Studying interaction between children who do not use symbols in interaction and their parents within the family system -- methodological challenges: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 28(3) Feb 2006, 175-182.
  +
*Green, C. W., Canipe, V. S., Way, P. J., & Reid, D. H. (1986). Improving the functional utility and effectiveness of classroom services for students with profound multiple handicaps: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 11(3) Fal 1986, 162-170.
  +
*Green, C. W., Middleton, S. G., & Reid, D. H. (2000). Embedded evaluation of preferences sampled from person-centered plans for people with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 33(4) Win 2000, 639-642.
  +
*Green, C. W., & Reid, D. H. (1999). A behavioral approach to identifying sources of happiness and unhappiness among individuals with profound multiple disabilities: Behavior Modification Vol 23(2) Apr 1999, 280-293.
  +
*Green, C. W., & Reid, D. H. (1999). Reducing indices of unhappiness among individuals with profound multiple disabilities during therapeutic exercise routines: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 32(2) Sum 1999, 137-147.
  +
*Green, C. W., Reid, D. H., Canipe, V. S., & Gardner, S. M. (1991). A comprehensive evaluation of reinforcer identification processes for persons with profound multiple handicaps: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 24(3) Fal 1991, 537-552.
  +
*Green, C. W., Reid, D. H., Rollyson, J. H., & Passante, S. C. (2005). An Enriched Teaching Program for Reducing Resistance and Indices of Unhappiness Among Individuals With Profound Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 38(2) Sum 2005, 221-233.
  +
*Greene, B. F., Willis, B. S., Levy, R., & Bailey, J. S. (1978). Measuring client gains from staff-implemented programs: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 11(3) Fal 1978, 395-412.
  +
*Greenwald, M. A. (1978). The effectiveness of distorted music versus interrupted music to decrease self-stimulatory behaviors in profoundly retarded adolescents: Journal of Music Therapy Vol 15(2) Sum 1978, 58-66.
  +
*Griffin, J. C., Ricketts, R. W., Williams, D. E., Locke, B. J., & et al. (1987). A community survey of self-injurious behavior among developmentally disabled children and adolescents: Hospital & Community Psychiatry Vol 38(9) Sep 1987, 959-963.
  +
*Griggs, C. A., Jones, P. M., & Lee, R. E. (1989). Videofluoroscopic investigation of feeding disorders of children with multiple handicap: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 31(3) Jun 1989, 303-308.
  +
*Grisham-Brown, J., Schuster, J. W., Hemmeter, M. L., & Collins, B. C. (2000). Using an embedding strategy to teach preschoolers with significant disabilities: Journal of Behavioral Education Vol 10(2-3) Sep 2000, 139-162.
  +
*Grove, N. (2007). Exploring the absence of high points in story reminiscence with carers of people with profound disabilities: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(4) Dec 2007, 252-260.
  +
*Guess, D., Mulligan-Ault, M., Roberts, S., Struth, J., & et al. (1988). Implications of biobehavioral states for the education and treatment of students with the most profoundly handicapping conditions: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 13(3) Fal 1988, 163-174.
  +
*Guess, D., Roberts, S., & Rues, J. (2002). Longitudinal analysis of state patterns and related variables among infants and children with significant disabilities: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 27(2) Sum 2002, 112-124.
  +
*Guess, D., Roberts, S., Siegel-Causey, E., Ault, M. M., & et al. (1993). Analysis of behavior state conditions and associated environmental variables among students with profound handicaps: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 97(6) May 1993, 634-653.
  +
*Guess, D., Roberts, S., Siegel-Causey, E., & Rues, J. (1995). Replication and extended analysis of behavior state, environmental events, and related variables among individuals with profound disabilities: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 100(1) Jul 1995, 36-50.
  +
*Guess, D., & Siegel-Causey, D. (1995). Attractor dimensions of behavior state changes among individuals with profound disabilities: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 99(6) May 1995, 642-663.
  +
*Guess, D., Siegel-Causey, E., Roberts, S., Guy, B., & et al. (1993). Analysis of state organizational patterns among students with profound disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 18(2) Sum 1993, 93-108.
  +
*Guess, D., Siegel-Causey, E., Roberts, S., Rues, J., & et al. (1990). Assessment and analysis of behavior state and related variables among students with profoundly handicapping conditions: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 15(4) Win 1990, 211-230.
  +
*Guldager, L. (1972). Using video tape in the education of deaf-blind children: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 66(6) Jun 1972, 178-182.
  +
*Guldager, L., Hamill, M., & McGlamery, R. D. (1983). Group homes for severely multiply handicapped persons with visual problems: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 77(1) Jan 1983, 4-8.
  +
*Gutierrez-Griep, R. (1984). Student preference of sensory reinforcers: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 19(2) Apr 1984, 108-113.
  +
*Guy, B. A. (1992). A Little Knowledge: PsycCRITIQUES Vol 37 (6), Jun, 1992.
  +
*Haelewyck, M.-C., & Bazier, G. (2002). Research and mental retardation in the Belgium and Luxembourg delegation of the AIRHM: Revue Francophone de la Deficience Intellectuelle Vol 13(2) Dec 2002, 167-187.
  +
*Hagberg, B., Edebol-Tysk, K., & Edstrom, B. (1988). The basic care needs of profoundly mentally retarded children with multiple handicaps: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 30(3) Jun 1988, 287-293.
  +
*Hagen, J. (2007). And yet it is possible! - Mentally handicapped persons as subjects of qualitative research: Vierteljahresschrift fur Heilpadagogik und ihre Nachbargebiete Vol 76(1) 2007, 22-34.
  +
*Hagiliassis, N., Gulbenkoglu, H., Di Marco, M., Young, S., & Hudson, A. (2005). The Anger Management Project: A group intervention for anger in people with physical and multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 30(2) Jun 2005, 86-96.
  +
*Hall, A., & Bailey, I. L. (1989). A model for training vision functioning: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 83(8) Oct 1989, 390-396.
  +
*Hall, A., Orel-Bixler, D., & Haegerstrom-Portnoy, G. (1991). Special visual assessment techniques for multiply handicapped persons: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 85(1) Jan 1991, 23-29.
  +
*Hamilton, T. (1979). Sexuality in deaf blind persons: Sexuality and Disability Vol 2(3) Fal 1979, 238-246.
  +
*Hammer, E. K. (1975). What is effective programming for deaf-blind children? : New Outlook for the Blind Vol 69(1) Jan 1975, 25-31.
  +
  +
*Hamre-Nietupski, S., Ayres, B., Nietupski, J., Savage, M., & et al. (1989). Enhancing integration of students with severe disabilities through curricular infusion: A general/special educator partnership: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 24(1) Mar 1989, 78-88.
  +
*Hanline, M. F. (1993). Inclusion of preschoolers with profound disabilities: An analysis of children's interactions: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 18(1) Spr 1993, 28-35.
  +
*Hanline, M. F., & Hanson, M. J. (1989). Integration considerations for infants and toddlers with multiple disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 14(3) Fal 1989, 178-183.
  +
*Hanson, M. J., & Hanline, M. F. (1985). An analysis of response-contingent learning experiences for young children: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 10(1) Spr 1985, 31-40.
  +
*Hardman, M. L., & Drew, C. J. (1977). The physically handicapped retarded individual: A review: Mental Retardation Vol 15(5) Oct 1977, 43-48.
  +
*Hardy, N., & Sturmey, P. (1994). Portage guide to early education: III. A rapid training and feedback system to teach and maintain mothers' teaching skills: Educational Psychology Vol 14(3) 1994, 345-358.
  +
*Harley, R. K., Long, R. G., Merbler, J. B., & Wood, T. A. (1987). Orientation and mobility for the blind multiply handicapped young child: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 81(8) Oct 1987, 377-381.
  +
*Harley, R. K., Merbler, J. B., & Wood, T. A. (1975). The development of a scale orientation and mobility for multiply impaired blind children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 7(1) Mar 1975, 1-5.
  +
*Harley, R. K., Wood, T. A., & Merbler, J. B. (1975). Programmed instruction in orientation and mobility for multiply impaired blind children: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 69(9) Nov 1975, 418-423.
  +
*Harper, D. C. (1984). Child behavior toward the parent: A factor analysis of mothers' reports of disabled children: Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders Vol 14(2) Jun 1984, 165-182.
  +
*Haupt, U., & Frohlich, A. (1983). Advancement of very severely handicapped children: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 6(4) Dec 1983, 492-494.
  +
*Haussler, M., Bartels, H., & Strassburg, H.-M. (1996). Multihandicapped blind and partially sighted children in South Germany: II. Aetiology & pathogenesis: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 38(12) Dec 1996, 1076-1090.
  +
*Haussler, M., Schafer, W.-D., & Neugebauer, H. (1996). Multihandicapped blind & partially sighted children in South Germany: I. Prevalence, impairments & ophthalmological findings: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 38(12) Dec 1996, 1068-1075.
  +
*Hawke, W. A., & Auerbach, A. (1975). Multi-discipline experience: A fresh approach to aid the multi-handicapped child: Journal of Rehabilitation Vol 41(1) Jan-Feb 1975, 22-24.
  +
*Hayashi, E. (2006). Daytime drowsiness and response to human stimuli in a child with severe intellectual and physical disabilities: Observation on eye-blink and daytime napping: Sleep and Biological Rhythms Vol 4(1) Feb 2006, 81-83.
  +
*Hegarty, J. R., & Last, A. (1997). Relaxation training for people who have severe/profound and multiple learning disabilities: British Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 43(85, Pt 2) Jul 1997, 122-139.
  +
*Hespos, M. A. (1977). Social consequences of being labeled mentally retarded: Vierteljahresschrift fur Heilpadagogik und ihre Nachbargebiete Vol 46(1) Mar 1977, 56-61.
  +
*Hetherington, R. W., Suttill, J., Holmlund, C., & Frey, D. D. (1979). Evaluation of a regional resource center for multiply handicapped retarded children: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 83(4) Jan 1979, 367-379.
  +
*Heuer, S. (1989). Leila: II: Pratique des Mots No 67 Jun 1989, 19-24.
  +
*Hewitt, H. (1978). An educational schema for children with the dual disability of deafness and blindness: Australian Journal of Mental Retardation Vol 5(3) Sep 1978, 81-85.
  +
*Hewson, S., McConkey, R., & Jeffree, D. (1980). The relationship between structured and free play in the development of a mentally handicapped child: A case study: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 6(2) Mar-Apr 1980, 73-82.
  +
*Hiemstra, S. J., Vlaskamp, C., & Wiersma, L. A. (2007). Individual focus in an activity centre: An observational study among persons with profound and multiple disabilities: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 42(1) Mar 2007, 14-23.
  +
*Hill, S. D., & Tomlin, C. (1981). Self-recognition in retarded children: Child Development Vol 52(1) Mar 1981, 145-150.
  +
*Hinderscheit, L. R., & Reichle, J. (1987). Teaching direct select color encoding to an adolescent with multiple handicaps: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 3(3) Sep 1987, 137-142.
  +
*Hinrichs, C. A. (1992). Vision rehabilitation for the multiply challenged child: Journal of Optometric Vision Development Vol 23(2) Jun 1992, 9-13.
  +
*Ho, K. M., & Keiley, M. K. (2003). Dealing with denial: A systems approach for family professionals working with parents of individuals with multiple disabilities: The Family Journal Vol 11(3) Jul 2003, 239-247.
  +
*Hobbis, V., & Williams, T. (1986). Uses of mechanical vibration in the education of multiply handicaped blind children: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 80(10) Dec 1986, 1003-1004.
  +
*Hoffmann, M., Weithmann, G., & Rothenbacher, H. (2001). Psychometric analyses of Rivermead Behavioural Memory Test data from chronic multiple handicapped alcoholics: Zeitschrift fur Neuropsychologie Vol 12(3) Aug 2001, 201-206.
  +
*Hogg, J. (1982). Reduction of self-induced vomiting in a multiply handicapped girl by "lemon juice therapy" and concomitant changes in social behaviour: British Journal of Clinical Psychology Vol 21(3) Sep 1982, 227-228.
  +
*Hogg, J. (1983). Sensory and social reinforcement of head-turning in a profoundly retarded multiply handicapped child: British Journal of Clinical Psychology Vol 22(1) Feb 1983, 33-40.
  +
*Hogg, J. (2007). Complex needs and complex solutions: The challenge of profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 79-82.
  +
*Hogg, J., Juhlberg, K., & Lambe, L. (2007). Policy, service pathways and mortality: A 10-year longitudinal study of people with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 51(5) May 2007, 366-376.
  +
*Hogg, J., Reeves, D., Roberts, J., & Mudford, O. C. (2001). Consistency, context and confidence in judgements of affective communication in adults with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 45(1) Feb 2001, 18-29.
  +
*Holburn, S., Nguyen, D., & Vietze, P. (2004). Computer-Assisted Learning for Adults with Profound Multiple Disabilities: Behavioral Interventions Vol 19(1) Feb 2004, 25-37.
  +
*Holden, J., Jacobson, S., & Wagner, M. (1987). Dustin, the youngest resident: Geriatric Nursing Vol 8(1) Jan-Feb 1987, 22-25.
  +
*Hollins, S. (1988). Discussion on Paper by Gerhard Rudnitzki: Group Analysis Vol 21(2) Jun 1988, 178-180.
  +
*Holmes, C. S. (1982). Self-monitoring reactivity and a severe feeding problem: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 11(1) Spr 1982, 66-71.
  +
*Hong, C. S. (1984). A close look at the contact between our regular clients and staff in small and large play sessions: British Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 47(4) Apr 1984, 121-122.
  +
*Hood, E.-J. L., Test, D. W., Spooner, F., & Steele, R. (1996). Paid co-worker support for individuals with severe and multiple disabilities: Education & Training in Mental Retardation & Developmental Disabilities Vol 31(3) Sep 1996, 251-265.
  +
*Hooper, J., Connell, T. M., & Flett, P. J. (1987). Blissymbols and manual signs: A multimodal approach to intervention in a case of multiple disability: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 3(2) Jun 1987, 68-76.
  +
*Hopper, C., York, R., Simmons, P., & Reske, S. (1976). Reduction of the hand-mouthing behavior of a profoundly retarded, multiply-handicapped student: Child Study Journal Vol 6(3) 1976, 113-126.
  +
*Horn, E., Jones, H. A., & Hamlett, C. (1991). An investigation of the feasibility of a video game system for developing scanning and selection skills: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 16(2) Sum 1991, 108-115.
  +
*Horsfall, D., & Maggs, A. (1986). Cooking skills instruction with severely multiply handicapped adolescents: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 12(3) Sep 1986, 177-186.
  +
*Houtgast, T., & Kramer, S. E. (2007). On the inclusion of cognitive aspects within the European project HearCom: Journal of the American Academy of Audiology Vol 18(7) Jul-Aug 2007, 632-633.
  +
*Huber, B., Hauser, I., Horstmann, V., Jokeit, G., Liem, S., May, T., et al. (2007). Long-term course of epilepsy in a large cohort of intellectually disabled patients: Seizure Vol 16(1) Jan 2007, 35-42.
  +
*Hughes, C., Rung, L. L., Wehmeyer, M. L., Agran, M., Copeland, S. R., & Hwang, B. (2000). Self-prompted communication book use to increase social interaction among high school students: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(3) Fal 2000, 153-166.
  +
*Hughes, C., Rung, L. L., Wehmeyer, M. L., Agran, M., Copeland, S. R., & Hwang, B. (2000). "Self-prompted communication book use to increase social interaction among high school students": Erratum: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(4) Win 2000, 259.
  +
*Hughes, M. W., Schuster, J. W., & Nelson, C. M. (1993). The acquisition of independent dressing skills by students with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 5(3) Sep 1993, 233-252.
  +
*Hulme, J. B., & et al. (1983). Perceived behavioral changes in multihandicapped individuals using adapted equipment: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 3(3) Fal 1983, 63-73.
  +
*Hulme, J. B., Shaver, J., Acher, S., Mullette, L., & et al. (1987). Effects of adaptive seating devices on the eating and drinking of children with multiple handicaps: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 41(2) Feb 1987, 81-89.
  +
*Hundert, J. (1982). Training teachers in generalized writing of behavior modification programs for multihandicapped deaf children: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 15(1) Spr 1982, 111-122.
  +
*Hunt, P., Alwell, M., Farron-Davis, F., & Goetz, L. (1996). Creating socially supportive environments for fully included students who experience multiple disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 21(2) Sum 1996, 53-71.
  +
*Hunt, P., & Goetz, L. (1988). Teaching spontaneous communication in natural settings through interrupted behavior chains: Topics in Language Disorders Vol 9(1) Dec 1988, 58-71.
  +
*Hunt, P., Staub, D., Alwell, M., & Goetz, L. (1994). Achievement by all students within the context of cooperative learning groups: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 19(4) Win 1994, 290-301.
  +
*Hurlbut, B. I., Iwata, B. A., & Green, J. D. (1982). Nonvocal language acquisition in adolescents with severe physical disabilities: Blissymbol versus iconic stimulus formats: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 15(2) Sum 1982, 241-258.
  +
*Hutton, W. O., Talkington, L. W., & Altman, R. (1973). Concomitants of multiple sensory defect: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 37(3) Dec 1973, 740-742.
  +
*Irvin, L. K., & Lundervold, D. A. (1988). Social validation of decelerative (punishment) procedures by special educators of severely handicapped students: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 9(4) 1988, 331-350.
  +
*Ismail, H. (1976). Considerations in the provision of comprehensive care for children with severe visual handicap: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 2(2) Mar-Apr 1976, 99-106.
  +
*Izen, C. L., & Brown, F. (1991). Education and treatment needs of students with profound, multiply handicapping, and medically fragile conditions: A survey of teachers' perceptions: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 16(2) Sum 1991, 94-103.
  +
*Jackson, A. J., Morrison, E., O'Donoghue, E., Wilson, H., & et al. (1991). The provision of ophthalmic services for a rehabilitation day care centre population with multiple physical handicaps: Ophthalmic and Physiological Optics Vol 11(4) Oct 1991, 314-319.
  +
*Jackson, L., Ryndak, D. L., & Billingsley, F. (2000). Useful practices in inclusive education: A preliminary view of what experts in moderate to severe disabilities are saying: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(3) Fal 2000, 129-141.
  +
*Jacobson, J. W., & Janicki, M. P. (1983). Observed prevalence of multiple developmental disabilities: Mental Retardation Vol 21(3) Jun 1983, 87-94.
  +
*Jan, J. E., & Freeman, R. D. (2004). Melatonin therapy for circadian rhythm sleep disorders in children with multiple disabilities: What have we learned in the last decade? : Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 46(11) Nov 2004, 776-782.
  +
*Jan, J. E., Good, W. V., Freeman, R. D., & Espezel, H. (1994). Eye-poking: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 36(4) Apr 1994, 321-325.
  +
*Jansson, L. M., Diamond, O., & Demb, H. B. (1992). Encopresis in a multihandicapped child: Rapid multidisciplinary treatment: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(1) Mar 1992, 83-90.
  +
*Janz, F. (2007). "It does work somehow...!"--Concept and design of inter-professional cooperation in classroom teams working with pupils with severe and multiple disabilities: Vierteljahresschrift fur Heilpadagogik und ihre Nachbargebiete Vol 76(4) 2007, 302-314.
  +
*Jarman, P. H., Iwata, B. A., & Lorentzson, A. M. (1983). Development of morning self-care routines in multiply handicapped persons: Applied Research in Mental Retardation Vol 4(2) 1983, 113-122.
  +
*Jensema, C. J. (1975). A note on the achievement test scores of multiply handicapped hearing impaired children: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 120(1) Feb 1975, 37-39.
  +
*Johnson, C. M. (1977). Errorless learning in a multihandicapped adolescent: Education & Treatment of Children Vol 1(1) Fal 1977, 25-33.
  +
*Johnson, C. R., & Babbitt, R. L. (1993). Antecedent manipulation in the treatment of primary solid food refusal: Behavior Modification Vol 17(4) Oct 1993, 510-521.
  +
*Jones, T. W. (1984). A framework of identification, classification, and placement of multihandicapped hearing-impaired students: Volta Review Vol 86(3) Apr 1984, 142-151.
  +
*Jones, T. W., & Dunne, M. T. (1988). The CHARGE association: Implications for teachers: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 133(1) Mar 1988, 36-39.
  +
*Jung, B., & Miller, B. E. (1998). Fieldwork education in a community agency serving residents with multiple disabilities: Opportunities and challenges: Journal on Developmental Disabilities Vol 6(1) Aug 1998, 60-72.
  +
*Kanthor, H. (1982). Can the practicing pediatrician provide comprehensive health care for the multiply handicapped child? : Clinical Pediatrics Vol 21(5) May 1982, 311-312.
  +
*Kardos, M. T. (1985). Retardation in the organization of reasoning in children with cerebral palsy with several handicaps and attempt of care and treatment: Neuropsychiatrie de l'Enfance et de l'Adolescence Vol 33(1) Jan 1985, 13-20.
  +
*Karp, A. (1985). Hearing loss associated with retinitis pigmentosa: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(9) Nov 1985, 404-405.
  +
*Katsiyannis, A. (1992). Timothy W.: The zero reject principle revisited: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(1) Mar 1992, 91-95.
  +
*Kelley, P., & Wedding, J. A. (1995). Medications used by students with visual and multiple impairments: Implications for teachers: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 89(1) Jan-Feb 1995, 38-45.
  +
*Kennedy, C. H., & Haring, T. G. (1993). Teaching choice making during social interactions to students with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 26(1) Spr 1993, 63-76.
  +
*Kerbeshian, J., & et al. (1985). Gilles de la Tourette disease in multiply disabled children: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 46(9-10) Sep-Oct 1985, 255-258.
  +
*Kershman, S. M., & Napier, D. (1982). Systematic procedures for eliciting and recording responses to sound stimuli in deaf-blind multihandicapped children: Volta Review Vol 84(4) May 1982, 226-237.
  +
*Ketchum, B. (1977). The day care alternative: Facilitating normalization of preschool multi-handicapped children: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 6(3) Win 1977, 45-47.
  +
*Khan, N. A., & Battle, C. U. (1987). Chronic illness: Implications for development and education: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 6(4) Win 1987, 25-32.
  +
*Kiernan, C. (1977). Toward a curriculum for the profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped child: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 3(4) Jul-Aug 1977, 229-239.
  +
*Kiernan, D. W., & DuBose, R. F. (1974). Assessing the cognitive development of pre-school deaf-blind children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 6(4) Dec 1974, 103-105.
  +
*Kir-Stimon, W. (1978). Psychodynamics in rehabilitation of the physically disabled: Rehabilitation Psychology Vol 25(4) 1978, 187-194.
  +
*Klein, B., Van Hasselt, V. B., Trefelner, M., Sandstrom, D. J., & et al. (1988). The Parent and Toddler Training Project for visually impaired and blind multihandicapped children: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 82(2) Feb 1988, 59-64.
  +
*Klein, C. (1977). Coping patterns of parents of deaf-blind children: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 122(3) Jun 1977, 310-312.
  +
*Klewe, L. (1993). An empirical evaluation of spelling boards as a means of communication for the multihandicapped: Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders Vol 23(3) Sep 1993, 559-566.
  +
*Klineman, J. (1975). Hidden abilities discovered among multiply handicapped blind children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 7(3) Oct 1975, 90-96.
  +
*Knight, M. S., & Rosenblatt, L. (1983). The effects of bimodal (sound-light) stimulus presentation on selective responding of deaf-blind multihandicapped children: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 128(3) Jun 1983, 397-401.
  +
*Knill, C. (1983). Body awareness, communication and development: A programme employing music with the profoundly handicapped: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 6(4) Dec 1983, 489-492.
  +
*Koga, S. (1995). A scale measuring trainers' skill in Dousa-hou: Scale construction, reliability, and validity: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 33(3) Nov 1995, 13-21.
  +
*Kondratov, R. R. (1982). Theoretical problems of individual psychological development in works of I. A. Sokolyansky and A. I. Metscheryakov: Voprosy Psychologii No 2 Mar-Apr 1982, 41-50.
  +
*Konig, M. A. (1986). Early education in multiple disabled children with visual disorders: Fruhforderung interdisziplinar Vol 5(2) 1986, 73-78.
  +
*Koppenhaver, D. A., Hendrix, M. P., & Williams, A. R. (2007). Toward evidence-based literacy interventions for children with severe and multiple disabilities: Seminars in Speech & Language Vol 28(1) Feb 2007, 79-90.
  +
*Korkowski, H. (1993). Handicaps and coping processes: Two case reports: Zeitschrift fur Individualpsychologie Vol 18(2) 1993, 155-167.
  +
*Krasner, P. R., & Silverstein, L. (1976). The Preschool Attainment Record: A concurrent validity study with cerebral palsied children: Educational and Psychological Measurement Vol 36(4) Win 1976, 1049-1054.
  +
*Kratzer, D. A., Spooner, F., Test, D. W., & Koorland, M. A. (1993). Extending the application of constant time delay: Teaching a requesting skill to students with severe multiple disabilities: Education & Treatment of Children Vol 16(3) Aug 1993, 235-253.
  +
*Kronick, M. K. (1987). Children and canes: An adaptive approach: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 81(2) Feb 1987, 61-62.
  +
*Krout, R. (1987). Music therapy with multi-handicapped students: Individualizing treatment within a group setting: Journal of Music Therapy Vol 24(1) Spr 1987, 2-13.
  +
*Kuharski, T., Rues, J., Cook, D., & Guess, D. (1985). Effects of vestibular stimulation on sitting behaviors among preschoolers with severe handicaps: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 10(3) Fal 1985, 137-145.
  +
*Kuperman, S., Black, D. W., & Burns, T. L. (1988). Excess mortality among formerly hospitalized child psychiatric patients: Archives of General Psychiatry Vol 45(3) Mar 1988, 277-282.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Abels, J., Wilms, E. H., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Groeneweg, J. (2003). Microswitch responding and awareness of contingency in persons with profound multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 96(3) Jun 2003, 835-838.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Antonucci, M., De Pace, C., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., et al. (2007). Enabling two adolescents with multiple disabilities to choose among environmental stimuli through different procedural and technological approaches: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 105(2) Oct 2007, 362-372.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Belardinelli, M. O., Chiapparino, C., Angelillo, M. T., Stasolla, F., Singh, N. N., et al. (2008). Learning in post-coma persons with profound multiple disabilities: Two case evaluations: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 20(3) Jun 2008, 209-216.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Belardinelli, M. O., Stasolla, F., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., et al. (2008). Promoting engagement, requests and choice by a man with post-coma pervasive motor impairment and minimally conscious state through a technology-based program: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 20(4) Aug 2008, 379-388.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Bellini, D., & Oliva, D. (1993). Building choice opportunities within a robot-assisted occupational program: A case study: Behavioral Residential Treatment Vol 8(3) Jul 1993, 219-226.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Bellini, D., & Oliva, D. (1993). A robot to provide multihandicapped blind persons with physical guidance and activity choices: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 5(4) Dec 1993, 337-348.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Campodonico, F., & Mantini, M. (1998). An automatic prompting system for improving the performance of a woman with multiple disabilities: Scandinavian Journal of Behaviour Therapy Vol 27(4) 1998, 145-148.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Campodonico, F., & Mantini, M. (1999). Promoting mild physical exercise in a person with profound multiple disabilities: Scandinavian Journal of Behaviour Therapy Vol 28(3) 1999, 115-118.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Comes, M. L., Stasolla, F., Manfredi, F., O'Reilly, M. F., & Singh, N. N. (2005). A Microswitch Cluster to Enhance Arm-Lifting Responses Without Dystonic Head Tilting by a Child With Multiple Disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 100(3) Jun 2005, 892-894.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., & Coninx, F. (1995). A classical conditioning procedure for auditory testing: Air puff audiometry: Scandinavian Audiology Supplement Vol 24(Suppl 40) 1995, 43-48.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Coninx, F., Manders, N., & Driessen, M. (1989). Use of automatic cueing to reduce drooling in two multihandicapped students: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 2(3) Sep 1989, 201-210.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Coninx, F., Manders, N., Driessen, M., & et al. (1991). Reducing breaks in performance of multihandicapped students through automatic prompting or peer supervision: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 3(2) Jun 1991, 115-128.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Coninx, F., & Smeets, P. M. (1989). A classical conditioning procedure for the hearing assessment of multiply handicapped persons: Journal of Speech & Hearing Disorders Vol 54(1) Feb 1989, 88-93.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., & et al. (1984). Effects of gross motor activities on the severe self-injurious tantrums of multihandicapped individuals: Applied Research in Mental Retardation Vol 5(4) 1984, 471-482.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Gigante, A., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Montironi, L. (2000). Indoor travel and simple tasks as physical exercise for people with profound multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 91(1) Aug 2000, 211-216.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Klaase, M., & Goossens, A. (1995). Pictorial vs. auditory prompt systems for promoting independent task performance in adolescents with multiple handicaps: Behavioral Interventions Vol 10(4) Oct 1995, 237-244.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., & Mantini, M. (1999). A corrective-feedback system for helping a person with multiple disabilities during indoor travel: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 88(3, Pt 2) Jun 1999, 1291-1295.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Mantini, M., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (1999). An adapted acoustic orientation system for promoting independent indoor travel and activity in persons with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 11(1) Mar 1999, 35-46.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O 'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Campodonico, F., et al. (2007). Helping three persons with multiple disabilities acquire independent dressing through assistive technology: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(12) Dec 2007, 768-773.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O' Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Montironi, G., et al. (2005). Extending the evaluation of a computer system used as a microswitch for word utterances of persons with multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 49(9) Sep 2005, 639-646.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., & Oliva, D. (1988). A computer-aided programme for low-functioning persons: A reply to Odor and Aitken: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 32(4) Aug 1988, 265-269.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., & Oliva, D. (1988). A computer-aided programme for promoting unsupervized activities for multihandicapped adolescents: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 32(2) Apr 1988, 125-136.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & Bracalente, S. (1994). An electronic guidance system for multihandicapped blind persons: Evaluating its effectiveness and likableness: Behavioral Interventions Vol 9(2) Apr 1994, 93-103.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & O"Reilly, M. F. (1997). Ambulation, object manipulation, and multiple disabilities: Extending the applicability of a robot: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 91(1) Jan-Feb 1997, 53-60.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & Raimondi, D. (1989). Teaching two low-functioning deaf-blind persons to cooperate in activities: Role of a computer-aided program: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 2(1) Mar 1989, 35-42.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & Raimondi, D. (1992). Two multihandicapped blind persons promoting mobility and activity in a passive deaf-blind companion: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 1992, 129-139.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & Signorino, M. (1994). Promoting ambulation and object manipulation in persons with multiple handicaps through the use of a robot: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 79(2) Oct 1994, 843-848.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & Ten Hoopen, G. (1997). Spoken messages as auditory cues for orientation in promoting indoor travel and activity by persons with multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 85(2) Oct 1997, 403-410.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., & Basili, G. (2001). Use of microswitches and speech output systems with people with severe/profound intellectual or multiple disabilities: A literature review: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 22(1) Jan-Feb 2001, 21-40.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., & Campodonico, F. (2001). Technological resources to support adaptive responding with persons with multiple disabilities: Scandinavian Journal of Behaviour Therapy Vol 30(1) Feb 2001, 17-22.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., & Campodonico, F. (2002). Promoting fluency of performance of self-help tasks with a person with multiple disabilities: Behavioral Interventions Vol 17(1) Jan-Mar 2002, 15-20.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Campodonico, F., & Mantini, M. (2002). Increasing indices of happiness and positive engagement in persons with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 14(3) Sep 2002, 231-237.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Campodonico, F., & Serenelli, S. (2000). Use of anticipatory cues to reduce dependence on physical prompts by an adolescent with multiple disabilities: Scandinavian Journal of Behaviour Therapy Vol 29(1) 2000, 43-47.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Cognini, I., & Serenelli, S. (2001). Cooperative task performance and preferences of people with multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 92(3, Pt 2) Jun 2001, 1199-1201.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., & Mantini, M. (1999). Activity arrangements with or without mobility and performance of persons with profound multiple disabilities over long sessions: Irish Journal of Psychology Vol 20(2-4) 1999, 124-135.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (1997). Instruction strategies for promoting vocational activities: A preliminary assessment of preferences with persons with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 9(2) Jun 1997, 79-89.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Coppa, M. M. (2001). A microswitch for vocalization responses to foster environmental control in children with multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 45(3) Jun 2001, 271-275.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Coppa, M. M. (2001). Using multiple microswitches to promote different responses in children with multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 22(4) Jul-Aug 2001, 309-318.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Pellegrino, A. (1997). Persons with multiple disabilities acquiring independent task performance through a self-operated verbal instruction system: Irish Journal of Psychology Vol 18(4) 1997, 419-429.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Singh, N. N., & Coppa, M. M. (2002). Multiple microswitches for multiple responses with children with profound disabilities: Cognitive Behaviour Therapy Vol 31(2) 2002, 81-87.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., & Basili, G. (2004). Enabling a person with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behaviour to control environmental stimulation with chin movements: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 26(21-22) Nov 2004, 1291-1294.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Campodonico, F., Marziani, M., & Oliva, D. (2004). A microswitch program to foster simple foot and leg movements in adult wheelchair users with multiple disabilities: Cognitive Behaviour Therapy Vol 33(3) 2004, 137-142.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Groeneweg, J., Bosco, A., Tota, A., et al. (2006). A Social Validation Assessment of Microswitch-Based Programs for Persons with Multiple Disabilities Employing Teacher Trainees and Parents as Raters: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 18(4) Dec 2006, 383-391.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Baccani, S., Severini, L., et al. (2006). Micro-switch programmes for students with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behaviour: Assessing response acquisition and choice: Pediatric Rehabilitation Vol 9(2) Apr-Jun 2006, 137-143.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Campodonico, F., & Groeneweg, J. (2003). Stimulation and microswitch-based programs for enhancing indices of happiness: A maintenance assessment: Behavioral Interventions Vol 18(1) Feb 2003, 53-61.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Coppa, M. M., & Montironi, G. (2005). A New Microswitch To Enable A Boy With Minimal Motor Behavior To Control Environmental Stimulation With Eye Blinks: Behavioral Interventions Vol 20(2) Apr 2005, 147-153.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., & Groeneweg, J. (2002). Impact of stimulation versus microswitch-based programs on indices of happiness of people with profound multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 23(2) Mar-Apr 2002, 149-160.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., & Groeneweg, J. (2003). Using microswitches with persons who have profound multiple disabilities: Evaluation of three cases: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 97(3, Pt 1) Dec 2003, 909-916.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Marziani, M., & Groeneweg, J. (2002). A social validation assessment of the use of microswitches with persons with multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 23(5) Sep-Oct 2002, 309-318.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Montironi, G., & Chierchie, S. (2004). Assessing a New Response-microswitch Combination With a Boy With Minimal Motor Behavior: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 98(2) Apr 2004, 459-462.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Piazzolla, G., Gatto, L., et al. (2006). Multiple microswitches for persons with multiple disabilities: A basic procedure to examine the persons' choice behavior: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 102(1) Feb 2006, 13-16.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Piazzolla, G., & Groeneweg, J. (2004). Assessing Influence of Stimulation on Mood and Aberrant Behavior of Persons With Multiple Disabilities During Brief Treadmill Sessions: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 99(3,Part1) Dec 2004, 931-936.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Piazzolla, G., Pirani, P., et al. (2002). Evaluating the use of multiple microswitches and responses for children with multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 46(4) May 2002, 346-351.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Scalini, L., Vigo, C. M., et al. (2005). Further Evaluation of Microswitch Clusters to Enhance Hand Response and Head Control in Persons With Multiple Disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 100(3) Jun 2005, 689-694.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Pidala, S., Piazzolla, G., Oliva, D., et al. (2006). A Social Validation Assessment of Cooperative versus Individual Task Engagement of Persons with Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 100(3) Mar 2006, 169-173.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., & Sigafoos, J. (2006). Promoting fluency of performance during morning dressing by two persons with multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 103(3) Dec 2006, 771-777.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2007). Persons with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behavior using small forehead movements and new microswitch technology to control environmental stimuli: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 104(3, Pt 1) Jun 2007, 870-878.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2007). Small hand-closure movements used as a response through microswitch technology by persons with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behavior: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 104(3, Pt 1) Jun 2007, 1027-1034.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2006). A Microswitch-based Program to Enable Students with Multiple Disabilities to Choose Among Environmental Stimuli: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 100(8) Aug 2006, 488-493.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Antonucci, M., et al. (2008). Microstuitch-based programs for persons with multiple disabilities: An overview of some recent developments: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 106(2) Apr 2008, 355-370.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Baccani, S., et al. (2004). Technological aids to promote basic developmental achievements by children with multiple disabilities: Evaluation of two cases: Cognitive Processing Vol 5(4) Dec 2004, 232-238.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Baccani, S., et al. (2006). Microswitch Clusters Promote Adaptive Responses and Reduce Finger Mouthing in a Boy With Multiple Disabilities: Behavior Modification Vol 30(6) Nov 2006, 892-900.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Severini, L. (2006). Enabling Persons with Multiple Disabilities to Choose Among Environmental Stimuli and Request Stimulus Repetitions Through Microswitch Computer Technology: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 103(2) Oct 2006, 354-362.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Severini, L. (2008). Enabling two persons with multiple disabilities to access environmental stimuli and ask for social contact through microswitches and a VOCA: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 29(1) Jan 2008, 21-28.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Severini, L. (2008). Three persons with multiple disabilities accessing environmental stimuli and asking for social contact through microswitch and VOCA technology: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 52(4) Apr 2008, 327-336.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Tota, A., Antonucci, M., et al. (2006). Children with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behavior using chin movements to operate microswitches to obtain environmental stimulation: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 27(3) May-Jun 2006, 290-298.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Stasolla, F., Manfredi, F., & Oliva, D. (2004). Adapting a Grid into a Microswitch to Suit Simple Hand Movements of a Child With Profound Multiple Disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 99(2) Oct 2004, 724-728.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Scalini, L., & Groeneweg, J. (2003). Microswitch clusters to enhance non-spastic response schemes with students with multiple disabilities: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 25(6) Mar 2003, 301-304.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Baccani, S., Pidala, S., Oliva, D., et al. (2005). Parents Provide Social Validation of Microswitch Programs for Children and Adults with Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Child and Family Studies Vol 14(2) Jun 2005, 159-165.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Campodonico, F., Oliva, D., & Groeneweg, J. (2004). Effects of automatically delivered stimulation on persons with multiple disabilities during their use of a stationary bicycle: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 98(3,Pt2) Jun 2004, 1363-1367.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Campodonico, F., Piazzolla, G., Scalini, L., et al. (2005). Impact of favorite stimuli automatically delivered on step responses of persons with multiple disabilities during their use of walker devices: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 26(1) Jan-Feb 2005, 71-76.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Campodonico, F., Scalini, L., & Oliva, D. (2003). Extending the use of familiar microswitches to difficult daily situations: Two case evaluations: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 96(3) Jun 2003, 927-930.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (2002). Multiple microswitches for children with multiple disabilities: Assessing response maintenance: Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions Vol 4(2) Spr 2002, 104-107.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (2002). Using a hand-tap response with a vibration microswitch with students with multiple disabilities: Behavioural and Cognitive Psychotherapy Vol 30(2) Apr 2002, 237-242.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (2003). Some Recent Research Efforts on Microswitches for Persons with Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Child and Family Studies Vol 12(3) Sep 2003, 251-256.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (2004). A microswitch program including words and choice opportunities for students with multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 98(1) Feb 2004, 214-222.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (2005). Microswitch programs for persons with multiple disabilities: An overview of the responses adopted for microswitch activation: Cognitive Processing Vol 6(3) Sep 2005, 177-188.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Baccani, S., & Canevaro, A. (2002). Using Simple Hand-Movement Responses with Optic Microswitches with Two Persons with Multiple Disabilities: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 27(4) Win 2002, 276-279.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Basili, G. (2005). An overview of research on increasing indices of happiness of people with severe/profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 27(3) Feb 2005, 83-93.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Campodonico, F., & Groeneweg, J. (2003). Assessing the effects of automatically delivered stimulation on the use of simple exercise tools by students with multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 24(6) Nov-Dec 2003, 475-483.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Campodonico, F., & Groeneweg, J. (2004). Impact of Favorite Stimuli on the Behavior of Persons with Multiple Disabilities While Using a Treadmill: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 98(5) May 2004, 304-309.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Campodonico, F., & Groeneweg, J. (2004). Use of simple exercise tools by students with multiple disabilities: Impact of automatically delivered stimulation on activity level and mood: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 16(2) Jun 2004, 171-178.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Dardanelli, E., & Pirani, P. (2003). Adapting the use of microswitches to foster response awareness and word association: Two case evaluations: Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions Vol 5(3) Sum 2003, 153-157.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Groeneweg, J. (2005). Enabling a Girl with Multiple Disabilities to Control Her Favorite Stimuli Through Vocalization and a Dual-Microphone Microswitch: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 99(3) Mar 2005, 179-182.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Montironi, G. (2004). A Computer System Serving as a Microswitch for Vocal Utterances of Persons with Multiple Disabilities: Two Case Evaluations: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 98(2) Feb 2004, 116-120.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Montrioni, G., Piazza, F., et al. (2004). Using computer systems as microswitches for vocal utterances of persons with multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 25(2) Mar-Apr 2004, 183-192.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Scalini, L., & Groeneweg, J. (2004). Improving Assisted Ambulation in a Man with Multiple Disabilities Through the Use of a Microswitch Cluster: Behavioural and Cognitive Psychotherapy Vol 32(2) Apr 2004, 245-249.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Severini, L. (2005). Assessing a microswitch-based stimulation procedure for eye-blinking responses in a young woman with profound multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 101(1) Aug 2005, 212-216.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Smaldone, A., Tota, A., et al. (2006). Assessing the effects of stimulation versus microswitch-based programmes on indices of happiness of students with multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 50(10) Oct 2006, 739-747.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Piazzolla, G., Pidala, S., & Oliva, D. (2005). Wheelchair-Bound Persons with Multiple Disabilities Learning to Use Simple Foot-Leg Responses Within a Microswitch-Based Program: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 17(4) Dec 2005, 327-336.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Campodonico, F., & Oliva, D. (2008). Self-management of orientation technology and auditory cues for indoor travel by two persons with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 20(2) Apr 2008, 129-138.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2007). A learning setup for a post-coma adolescent with profound multiple disabilities involving small forehead movements and new microswitch technology: Disability and Rehabilitation: Assistive Technology Vol 2(5) 2007, 293-297.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2008). A girl with multiple disabilities increases object manipulation and reduces hand mouthing through a microswitch-based program: Clinical Case Studies Vol 7(3) Jun 2008, 238-249.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2007). Fostering adaptive responses and head control in students with multiple disabilities through a microswitch-based program: Follow-up assessment and program revision: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 28(2) Mar-Apr 2007, 187-196.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2007). Effects of microswitch-based programs on indices of happiness of students with multiple disabilities: A new research evaluation: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 112(3) May 2007, 167-176.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Antonucci, M. (2006). A microswitch-based programme to enable a boy with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behaviour to choose among environmental stimuli: Disability and Rehabilitation: Assistive Technology Vol 1(3) Jun 2006, 205-208.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Baccani, S. (2006). Teaching 'yes' and 'no' responses to children with multiple disabilities through a program including microswitches linked to a vocal output device: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 102(1) Feb 2006, 51-61.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Baccani, S. (2007). Enabling students with multiple disabilities to request and choose among environmental stimuli through microswitch and computer technology: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 28(1) Jan-Feb 2007, 50-58.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Costantini, A., et al. (2006). An optic micro-switch for an eyelid response to foster environmental control in children with minimal motor behaviour: Pediatric Rehabilitation Vol 9(1) Jan-Mar 2006, 53-56.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Gatti, M., et al. (2008). A microswitch-cluster program to foster adaptive responses and head control in students with multiple disabilities: Replication and validation assessment: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 29(4) Jul 2008, 373-384.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Montironi, G. (2004). Evaluating a computer system used as a microswitch for word utterances of persons with multiple disabilities: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 26(21-22) Nov 2004, 1286-1290.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Piazzolla, G., et al. (2007). Automatically delivered stimulation for walker-assisted step responses: Measuring its effects in persons with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 19(1) Feb 2007, 1-13.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Pidala, S., et al. (2007). Promoting adaptive foot movements and reducing hand mouthing and eye poking in a boy with multiple disabilities through microswitch technology: Cognitive Behaviour Therapy Vol 36(2) 2007, 85-90.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Scalini, L., et al. (2007). Promoting foot-leg movements in children with multiple disabilities through the use of support devices and technology for regulating contingent stimulation: Cognitive Processing Vol 8(4) Dec 2007, 279-283.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Severini, L., et al. (2007). Microswitch technology to promote adaptive responses and reduce mouthing in two children with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 628-636.
  +
*Lancioni, G. E., Van Dijk, J., Driessen, M., & Manders, N. (1988). An automatic prompting instrument to increase task-related responding in low-functioning individuals: Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry Vol 19(4) Dec 1988, 267-273.
  +
*Lang, C., & Remington, D. (1994). Treatment with propranolol of severe self-injurious behavior in a blind, deaf, and retarded adolescent: Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry Vol 33(2) Feb 1994, 265-269.
  +
*Lasseter, J., Privette, G., Brown, C. C., & Duer, J. (1989). Dance as a treatment approach with a multidisabled child: Implications for school counseling: School Counselor Vol 36(4) Mar 1989, 310-315.
  +
*Lattimore, J., Stephens, T. E., Favell, J. E., & Risley, T. R. (1984). Increasing direct care staff compliance to individualized physical therapy body positioning prescriptions: Prescriptive checklists: Mental Retardation Vol 22(2) Apr 1984, 79-84.
  +
*Lavigueur, S., & Laurendeau, R. (1991). Collaboration between child care workers and families: A choice that modifies the attitude of the educators: Revue Canadienne de Psycho-Education Vol 20(2) 1991, 123-137.
  +
*Leatherby, J. G., Gast, D. L., Wolery, M., & Collins, B. C. (1992). Assessment of reinforcer preference in multi-handicapped students: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(1) Mar 1992, 15-36.
  +
*Leclerc, R., & St-Denis, C. (1992). Reorientation of a stereotypical behavior of a multiply handicapped child by means of positive reinforcement: Canadian Journal of Rehabilitation Vol 6(2) Win 1992, 99-104.
  +
*Lee, J. M., Mahler, T. J., & Westling, D. L. (1985). Reducing occurrences of an asymmetrical tonic neck reflex: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 89(6) May 1985, 617-621.
  +
*Lengyel, L. M., Domaracki, J. W., & Lyon, S. R. (1990). General case simulation instruction of generalized housekeeping skills in blind, multihandicapped adults: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 84(4) Apr 1990, 166-170.
  +
*Lennan, R. K. (1973). The deaf multi-handicapped unit at the California School for the Deaf, Riverside: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 118(3) Jun 1973, 439-445.
  +
*Lennerstrand, G., Axelsson, A., & Andersson, G. (1983). Visual testing with "preferential looking" in mentally retarded children: Behavioural Brain Research Vol 10(1) Oct 1983, 199-202.
  +
*Lewin, L. M., Lundervold, D., Saslow, M., & Thompson, S. (1989). Reducing eating dependency in nursing home patients: The effects of prompting, reinforcement, food preference and environmental design: Journal of Clinical & Experimental Gerontology Vol 11(1-2) Mar-Jun 1989, 47-63.
  +
*Lewis, M., & Brooks-Gunn, J. (1984). Age and handicapped group differences in infants' visual attention: Child Development Vol 55(3) Jun 1984, 858-868.
  +
*Lewis, M., Feiring, C., & Brooks-Gunn, J. (1988). Young children's social networks as a function of age and dysfunction: Infant Mental Health Journal Vol 9(2) Sum 1988, 142-157.
  +
*Lewis, S., & Hatlen, P. (1995). A caution against generalizations: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 89(1) Jan-Feb 1995, 90-91.
  +
*Li, A. (2003). A Model for Developing Programs to Improve the Use of Vision in Students Who Are Visually Impaired With Multiple Disabilities: RE:view Vol 35(1) Spr 2003, 31-47.
  +
*Liberti, G. (1984). Developing spatial-movement concepts in multiply handicapped students: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 78(3) Mar 1984, 121-122.
  +
*Lieberman, L. J., & Houston-Wilson, C. (1999). Overcoming the barriers to including students with visual impairments and deaf-blindness in physical education: RE:view Vol 31(3) Fal 1999, 129-138.
  +
*Lindberg, B., & Rasmussen, D. (1994). Method development with parent groups: Psykologisk Paedagogisk Radgivning Vol 31(1) Feb 1994, 21-25.
  +
*Linn, D. M., Rojahn, J., Helsel, W. J., & Dixon, J. (1988). Acute effects of transcutaneous electric nerve stimulation on self-injurious behavior: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 1(2) Jun 1988, 105-119.
  +
*Logan, K. R., & Gast, D. L. (2001). Conducting preference assessments and reinforcer testing for individuals with profound multiple disabilities: Issues and procedures: Exceptionality Vol 9(3) 2001, 123-134.
  +
*Logan, K. R., Jacobs, H. A., Gast, D. L., Smith, P. D., Daniel, J., & Rawls, J. (2001). Preferences and reinforcers for students with profound multiple disabilities: Can we identify them? : Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 13(2) Jun 2001, 97-122.
  +
*Lohrmann-O'Rourke, S., Browder, D. M., & Brown, F. (2000). Guidelines for conducting socially valid systematic preference assessments: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(1) Spr 2000, 42-53.
  +
*Luckner, J. L., & Carter, K. (2001). Essential competencies for teaching students with hearing loss and additional disabilities: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 146(1) Mar 2001, 7-15.
  +
*Lueck, A. H. (1998). Incorporating unique learning requirements into the design of instructional strategies for students with visual and multiple impairments: The basis for an expanded core curriculum: RE:view Vol 30(3) Fal 1998, 101-116.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K. (1987). Secondary diurnal enuresis: Evaluation of cueing and reinforcement interventions with a sensory-impaired youth: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 31(3) Sep 1987, 287-292.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K. (1988). Behavioral feeding intervention with deaf-blind, multihandicapped children: Child & Family Behavior Therapy Vol 10(4) 1988, 49-62.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K. (1988). Improvement of feeding skills in multihandicapped students through paced-prompting interventions: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 1(1) Mar 1988, 17-30.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K. (1988). Positive reinforcement interventions in the classroom: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 82(1) Jan 1988, 17-20.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K. (1994). Toilet training in children with sensory impairments in a residential school setting: Behavioral Interventions Vol 9(2) Apr 1994, 105-114.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K. (1998). Treatment of self-injurious hand-mouthing in a child with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 10(2) Jun 1998, 167-174.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K. (2007). Single-Case Evaluation of a Negative Reinforcement Toilet Training Intervention: Child & Family Behavior Therapy Vol 29(1) 2007, 59-69.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K., Beltis, J. A., & Bass, J. (1989). Clinical analysis of naltrexone in the treatment of self-injurious behavior: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 2(1) Mar 1989, 43-50.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K., Evans, T. P., & Boyce, D. A. (1985). Contingency management of food selectivity and oppositional eating in a multiply handicapped child: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 14(2) Sum 1985, 153-156.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K., & Lolli, D. A. (1987). Contingency management of a blind child's disruptive behaviors during mobility instruction: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 19(2) Sum 1987, 65-70.
  +
*Luiselli, J. K., Myles, E., Evans, T. P., & Boyce, D. A. (1985). Reinforcement control of severe dysfunctional behavior of blind, multihandicapped students: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 90(3) Nov 1985, 328-334.
  +
*Lyons, G. (2005). The Life Satisfaction Matrix: An instrument and procedure for assessing the subjective quality of life of individuals with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 49(10) Oct 2005, 766-769.
  +
*Ma, A. (1995). Effecting systems changes through consultation and collaboration: School Psychology International Vol 16(3) Aug 1995, 249-263.
  +
*Mac Neela, J. C. (1987). An overview of therapeutic positioning for multiply-handicapped persons, including augmentative communication users: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 7(2) Sum 1987, 39-60.
  +
*MacCuspie, P. A., Harmer, D., McConnell, J., Fricker, J., & et al. (1993). Short-term placements: A crucial role for residential schools: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 87(6) Jun 1993, 193-198.
  +
*Macdonald, J. (1984). Problems encountered by a child with congenital limb deformities: British Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 47(7) Jul 1984, 204-207.
  +
*Macdonald, R. J. (1985). On gaining independence as a deaf-blind person: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(5) May 1985, 205-208.
  +
*Macfarlane, C. A., Young, K. R., & West, R. P. (1987). An integrated school/home overcorrection procedure for eliminating stereotypic behavior in students with severe multiple handicaps: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 22(3) Sep 1987, 156-166.
  +
*Maes, B., Lambrechts, G., Hostyn, I., & Petry, K. (2007). Quality-enhancing interventions for people with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: A review of the empirical research literature: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 32(3) Sep 2007, 163-178.
  +
*Mahoney, D. J. (1976). A review of jobs undertaken by the mentally retarded: Australian Journal of Mental Retardation Vol 4(1) Mar 1976, 24-27.
  +
*Makus, H., & Makus, L. (1979). Play-therapy with a multiply-handicapped child: Praxis der Kinderpsychologie und Kinderpsychiatrie Vol 28(2) Feb-Mar 1979, 47-51.
  +
*Malakpa, S. W. G. (1994). Job placement of blind and visually impaired people with additional disabilities: RE:view Vol 26(2) Sum 1994, 69-77.
  +
*Mall, W., Amon, P., Beck, B., Castell, R., & et al. (1993). Multiple diagnoses and risks among primary school children: Zeitschrift fur Kinder- und Jugendpsychiatrie und Psychotherapie Vol 21(1) Mar 1993, 14-20.
  +
*Maloney, F. P., & Kurtz, P. A. (1982). The use of a mercury switch head control device in profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped children: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 2(4) Win 1982, 11-17.
  +
*Mamer, L. (1999). Visual development in students with visual and additional impairments: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 93(6) Jun 1999, 360-369.
  +
*Markowitz, J. B., Hebbeler, K., Larson, J. C., Cooper, J. A., & et al. (1991). Using value-added analysis to examine short-term effects of early intervention: Journal of Early Intervention Vol 15(4) Fal 1991, 377-389.
  +
*Maroldt, B. (2003). "My hands won't do it!" - Individual music therapy in a case of Rett Syndrome: Musiktherapeutische Umschau Vol 24(3) 2003, 215-226.
  +
*Martin, M., & Horsfall, D. (1987). Training work skills for students with severe and multiple handicapping conditions: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 13(3) Sep 1987, 151-159.
  +
*Marvin, C. (1994). Home literacy experiences of preschool children with single and multiple disabilities: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 14(4) Win 1994, 436-454.
  +
*Mathy-Laikko, P., Iacono, T., Ratcliff, A., Villarruel, F., & et al. (1989). Teaching a child with multiple disabilities to use a tactile augmentative communication device: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 5(4) Dec 1989, 249-256.
  +
*Matsumoto, Y. (1989). Changes of heart-rate before and after self-stimulated behavior on 2 severely-multiply handicapped: Japanese Journal of Physiological Psychology and Psychophysiology Vol 7(1) Jun 1989, 47-52.
  +
*Mattie, H. D., & Kozen, A. A. (2007). Consideration of behavior states and patterns in IEP development and daily planning: A multiple case study approach involving students with multiple disabilities: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 42(1) Mar 2007, 38-47.
  +
*Maurizi, M., Ottaviani, F., & Paludetti, G. (1995). Objective methods of hearing assessment: An introduction: Scandinavian Audiology Supplement Vol 24(Suppl 40) 1995, 5-7.
  +
*McCarran, M. S., & Andrasik, F. (1990). Behavioral weight-loss for multiply-handicapped adults: Assessing caretaker involvement and measures of behavior change: Addictive Behaviors Vol 15(1) 1990, 13-20.
  +
*McCarron, L. T. (1984). Assessment of learning style: The Perceptual Memory Task: Vocational Evaluation & Work Adjustment Bulletin Vol 17(2) Sum 1984, 52-58.
  +
*McConachie, H. R., & Sinason, V. (1989). The emotional experience of multiple handicap: Issues in assessment: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 15(1) Jan-Feb 1989, 75-78.
  +
*McConkey, R., Mariga, L., Braadland, N., & Mphole, P. (2000). Parents as trainers about disability in low income countries: International Journal of Disability, Development and Education Vol 47(3) Sep 2000, 310-317.
  +
*McCracken, W. M., & Bamford, J. M. (1995). Auditory prostheses for children with multiple handicaps: Scandinavian Audiology Supplement Vol 24(Suppl 40) 1995, 51-60.
  +
*McDonnell, J. (1987). The integration of students with severe handicaps into regular public schools: An analysis of parents perceptions of potential outcomes: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 22(2) Jun 1987, 98-111.
  +
*McDonnell, J., Thorson, N., & McQuivey, C. (2000). Comparison of the instructional contexts of students with severe disabilities and their peers in general education classes: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(1) Spr 2000, 54-58.
  +
*McDonnell, J., Thorson, N., McQuivey, C., & Kiefer-O'Donnell, R. (1997). Academic engaged time of students with low-incidence disabilities in general education classes: Mental Retardation Vol 35(1) Feb 1997, 18-26.
  +
*McGinnity, B. L. (1985). Community-based training: A component of career education for deaf-blind youth: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(10) Dec 1985, 466-467.
  +
*McLean, E. (1984). Ward teaching won't dop: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 10(5) Sep-Oct 1984, 261-271.
  +
*McNeill, A. W., & Mulholland, R. (1986). Consolidation memory theory applied to relearning motor skills in profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped children: Adapted Physical Activity Quarterly Vol 3(4) Oct 1986, 342-350.
  +
*Meacham, F. R., Kline, M. M., Stovall, J. A., & Sands, D. I. (1987). Adaptive behavior and low incidence handicaps: Hearing and visual impairments: The Journal of Special Education Vol 21(1) Spr 1987, 183-196.
  +
*Meadow, K. P. (1984). Social adjustment of preschool children: Deaf and hearing, with and without other handicaps: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 3(4) Jan 1984, 27-40.
  +
*Meadows, A. (2002). Approaches to music and movement for children with severe and profound multiple disabilities: Australian Journal of Music Therapy Vol 13 2002, 17-27.
  +
*Mellstrom, B. P., Saunders, M. D., Saunders, R. R., & Olswang, L. B. (2005). Interaction of Behavioral State and Microswitch Use in Individuals With Profound Multiple Impairments: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 17(1) Mar 2005, 35-53.
  +
*Merbler, J. B., & Harley, R. K. (1976). Implementation of a precision teaching data collection system in a program for multiply handicapped visually impaired children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 8(4) Win 1976-1977, 97-102.
  +
*Merucci, M. (2004). Accompanying aging people with multiple disabilities through the complex interaction: individual-family-institution: Therapie Familiale Vol 25(4) 2004, 601-610.
  +
*Migden, S. (1983). Issues in concurrent psychotherapy-remediation: Annals of Dyslexia Vol 33 1983, 275-288.
  +
*Mikhaylov, F. T., & Kondratov, R. R. (1982). Communication as a functional organ of the development of the psyche: Novye Issledovaniya v Psikhologii Vol 2(27) 1982, 3-7.
  +
*Milaat, W. A., Ghabrah, T. M., Salem Al-Bar, H. M., Abalkhail, B. A., & Kordy, M. N. (2001). Population-based survey of childhood disability in Eastern Jeddah using the ten questions tool: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 23(5) Mar 2001, 199-203.
  +
*Min, C. (2007). Developing vocational and transition programs for students who are visually impaired with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 659-661.
  +
*Mira, M. (1977). Tracking the motor behavior development of multihandicapped infants: Mental Retardation Vol 15(3) Jun 1977, 32-37.
  +
*Mira, M., & Hoffman, S. (1974). Educational programing for multihandicapped deaf-blind children: Exceptional Children Vol 40(7) Apr 1974, 513-514.
  +
*Mizrachi, N. (2001). When the hospital becomes home: Visibility, knowledge, and power at Nila: Journal of Contemporary Ethnography Vol 30(2) Apr 2001, 209-239.
  +
*Moersch, M. S. (1977). Training the deaf-blind child: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 31(7) Aug 1977, 425-431.
  +
*Morrow, L. W. (1985). Teaching self-control to dually diagnosed deaf students: Promising procedures: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 130(6) Dec 1985, 502-507.
  +
*Morrow, L. W., Burke, J. G., & Buell, B. J. (1985). Effects of a self-recording procedure on the attending to task behavior and academic productivity of adolescents with multiple handicaps: Mental Retardation Vol 23(3) Jun 1985, 137-141.
  +
*Morse, M. (1991). Visual gaze behaviors: Considerations in working with visually impaired multiply handicapped children: RE:view Vol 23(1) Spr 1991, 5-15.
  +
*Morse, M. T. (1990). Cortical visual impairment in young children with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 84(5) May 1990, 200-203.
  +
*Morse, M. T. (1992). Augmenting assessment procedures for children with severe multiple handicaps and sensory impairments: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 86(1) Jan 1992, 73-77.
  +
*Mu, K., Siegel, E. B., & Allinder, R. M. (2000). Peer interactions and sociometric status of high school students with moderate or severe disabilities in general education classrooms: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(3) Fal 2000, 142-152.
  +
*Mulholland, R., & McNeil, A. W. (1989). Heart rate responses of profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped children during closed-skill fine motor and open-skill gross motor activities: Adapted Physical Activity Quarterly Vol 6(1) Jan 1989, 68-78.
  +
*Mulholland, R., & McNeill, A. W. (1985). Cardiovascular responses of three profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped children during selected motor activities: Adapted Physical Activity Quarterly Vol 2(2) Apr 1985, 151-160.
  +
*Munkacsi, M. (1981). Educational opportunities for severely/profoundly handicapped children within the Calgary Board of Education: Mental Retardation Bulletin Vol 9(2-3) 1981, 112-121.
  +
*Murdoch, H. (1984). Maternal rubella: The implications: AEP (Association of Educational Psychologists) Journal Vol 6(5) Win 1984, 3-6.
  +
*Murphy, K. M., Saunders, M. D., Saunders, R. R., & Olswang, L. B. (2004). Effects of ambient stimuli on measures of behavioral state and microswitch use in adults with profound multiple impairments: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 25(4) Jul-Aug 2004, 355-370.
  +
*Murphy, R. J., & Doughty, N. R. (1977). Establishment of controlled arm movements in profoundly retarded students using response contingent vibratory stimulation: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 82(2) Sep 1977, 212-216.
  +
*Murray, J. N., & New, F. (1978). A goal of full service for handicapped students: Education Vol 98(3) Mar-Apr 1978, 325-333.
  +
*Murray, M., Clarke, S., & Worcester, J. (2002). A teacher's perspective of using PBS in a classroom for a girl with multiple disabilities: Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions Vol 4(3) Sum 2002, 189-192.
  +
*Musick, P. L. (1976). Special child--special growth: Developmental art therapy: Art Psychotherapy Vol 3(3-4) 1976, 135-144.
  +
*Nakken, H. (1993). Perspectives and goals: Central issues in intervention: Issues in Special Education & Rehabilitation Vol 8(1) 1993, 37-44.
  +
*Nakken, H., & den Ouden, W. J. (1985). Research on a psychomotor program for children with severe motor or multiple disabilities: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 8(1) 1985, 47-60.
  +
*Nakken, H., & Vlaskamp, C. (2007). A need for a taxonomy for profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 83-87.
  +
*Neff, J. (1979). Another perspective on sexuality and those who are deaf and blind: Sexuality and Disability Vol 2(3) Fal 1979, 206-210.
  +
*Neilson, A., Hogg, J., Malek, M., & Rowley, D. (2000). Impact of surgical and orthotic intervention on the quality of life of people with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities and their carers: Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 13(4) 2000, 216-238.
  +
*Neistadt, M. E., & Marques, K. (1984). An Independent Living Skills Training Program: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 38(10) Oct 1984, 671-676.
  +
*Nelson, C., van Dijk, J., McDonnell, A. P., & Thompson, K. (2002). A framework for understanding young children with severe multiple disabilities: The van Dijk approach to assessment: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 27(2) Sum 2002, 97-111.
  +
*Nigro, G. (1974). Recreation and adult education: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 35(9) Sep 1974, 268-271.
  +
*Niimi, A., & Uemura, K. (1987). Stresses on the parents of a handicapped child of school age: Analysis of stress patterns and description of representative mothers' stresses: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 25(2) Sep 1987, 29-38.
  +
*Norris, J. A., & Hoffman, P. R. (1990). Comparison of adult-initiated vs. child-initiated interaction styles with handicapped prelanguage children: Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools Vol 21(1) Jan 1990, 28-36.
  +
*Norton, Y. (1975). Neurodevelopment and sensory integration for the profoundly retarded multiply handicapped child: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 29(2) Feb 1975, 93-100.
  +
*Nwuga, V. C. (1985). A study of group-self identification among the disabled in Nigeria: A case for support groups: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 8(1) 1985, 61-67.
  +
*O'Brien, P. J. (1979). Evaluation of a transitional training program for mentally retarded, multiply handicapped high school students: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 40(8) Aug 1979, 232-235.
  +
*O'Brien, Y., Glenn, S., & Cunningham, C. (1994). Contingency awareness in infants and children with severe and profound learning disabilities: International Journal of Disability, Development and Education Vol 41(3) 1994, 231-243.
  +
*O'Donnell, B. (1976). Resident rights interview: Mental Retardation Vol 14(6) Dec 1976, 13-17.
  +
*Odor, J. P. (1988). Student models in machine-mediated learning: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 32(4) Aug 1988, 247-256.
  +
*Ohwaki, S., & Zingarelli, G. (1988). Feeding clients with severe multiple handicaps in a skilled nursing care facility: Mental Retardation Vol 26(1) Feb 1988, 21-24.
  +
*Olivares, X. (1990). Approach to the body image experienced by children with multiple handicaps through fairy tales: Bulletin de la Societe du Rorschach et des Methodes Projectives de Langue Francaise No 34 Jun 1990, 97-110.
  +
*Oliver, G., & Mazer, G. (1982). The Child Development School-Grande Prairie: A school for severely and multiply handicapped children: Mental Retardation Bulletin Vol 10(2-3) 1982, 69-87.
  +
*Olsson, C. (2004). Dyadic Interaction with a Child with Multiple Disabilities: A System Theory Perspective on Communication: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 20(4) Dec 2004, 228-242.
  +
*Olsson, C. (2005). The Use of Communicative Functions among Pre-school Children with Multiple Disabilities in Two Different Setting Conditions: Group Versus Individual Patterns: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 21(1) Mar 2005, 3-18.
  +
*Oreb, I. J., Antunovic, A., & Celizic, M. (2006). Components of oral-motor stimulation program: Hrvatska Revija Za Rehabilitacijska Istrazivanja Vol 42(1) 2006, 105-112.
  +
*Osguthorpe, R. T., & Chang, L. L. (1988). The effects of computerized symbol processor instruction on the communication skills of nonspeaking students: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 4(1) Mar 1988, 23-34.
  +
*Oswin, M. (1977). Physically handicapped children in long-stay hospitals: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 3(5) Sep-Oct 1977, 349-355.
  +
*Page, C. M., Bornhoeft, D. M., Barcome, D. F., & Knowlton, D. D. (1985). Providing outreach services in a rural setting utilizing a multidisciplinary team: The CARES Project: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 46(9-10) Sep-Oct 1985, 264-267.
  +
*Papageorgiou, D., Andreou, Y., & Soulis, S. (2008). The evaluation of a ten-week programme in Cyprus to integrate children with multiple disabilities and visual impairments into a mainstream primary school: Support for Learning Vol 23(1) Feb 2008, 19-25.
  +
*Parent, G., & Pare, C. (2003). Need analysis and measure of quality of life of people suffering of blindness and deafness related to mental retardation: Revue Francophone de la Deficience Intellectuelle Vol 14(1) Jun 2003, 5-39.
  +
*Parsons, M. B., Reid, D. H., & Green, C. W. (2001). Situational assessment of task preferences among adults with multiple severe disabilities in supported work: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 26(1) Spr 2001, 50-55.
  +
*Parsons, M. B., Reid, D. H., Green, C. W., & Browning, L. B. (2001). Reducing job coach assistance for supported workers with severe multiple disabilities: An alternative off-site/on-site model: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 22(2) Mar-Apr 2001, 151-164.
  +
*Parsons, M. B., Reid, D. H., Green, C. W., Browning, L. B., & Hensley, M. B. (2002). Evaluation of a shared-work program for reducing assistance provided to supported workers with severe multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 23(1) Jan-Feb 2002, 1-16.
  +
*Pasemann, M. (1989). Multiple handicap and every day relation: Fruhforderung interdisziplinar Vol 8(1) 1989, 19-26.
  +
*Pawelski, C. E., & Groveman, A. B. (1982). The community based model for life skills training: Pointer Vol 26(4) Sum 1982, 21-24.
  +
*Peck, C. A., Donaldson, J., & Pezzoli, M. (1990). Some benefits nonhandicapped adolescents perceive for themselves from their social relationships with peers who have severe handicaps: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 15(4) Win 1990, 241-249.
  +
*Pellock, J. M., & Morton, L. D. (2000). Treatment of epilepsy in the multiply handicapped: Mental Retardation and Developmental Disabilities Research Reviews Vol 6(4) 2000, 309-323.
  +
*Penfold, P. S. (1982). Children of battered women: International Journal of Mental Health Vol 11(1-2) Spr-Sum 1982, 108-114.
  +
*Perla, F., & Ducret, W. D. (1999). Guidelines for teaching orientation and mobility to children with multiple disabilities: RE:view Vol 31(3) Fal 1999, 113-119.
  +
*Perry, M. M. R. (2003). Relating Improvisational Music Therapy with Severely and Multiply Disabled Children to Communication Development: Journal of Music Therapy Vol 40(3) Fal 2003, 227-246.
  +
*Peters, R. H., Koller, J. R., & Holliday, G. A. (1995). A functional assessment approach to strategy development and implementation for a person with a specific learning disability: A case study: Journal of Applied Rehabilitation Counseling Vol 26(3) Fal 1995, 30-35.
  +
*Petitpierre, G., Wolf, D., Dietrich, A., Benz, M., & Adler, J. (2007). Integration of education and care given to children with profound multiple disabilities in Switzerland: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 141-151.
  +
*Petitpierre-Jost, G. (2005). Multisensory procedures for individuals with profound and multiple disabilities: How to improve the setting of educational and therapeutic provision: Devenir Vol 17(1) 2005, 39-53.
  +
*Petry, K., & Maes, B. (2006). Identifying expressions of pleasure and displeasure by persons with profound and multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 31(1) Mar 2006, 28-38.
  +
*Petry, K., & Maes, B. (2007). Description of the support needs of people with profound multiple disabilities using the 2002 AAMR System: An overview of literature: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 42(2) Jun 2007, 130-143.
  +
*Petry, K., Maes, B., & Vlaskamp, C. (2005). Domains of Quality of Life of People with Profound Multiple Disabilities: The Perspective of Parents and Direct Support Staff: Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 18(1) Mar 2005, 35-46.
  +
*Petry, K., Maes, B., & Vlaskamp, C. (2007). Operationalizing quality of life for people with profound multiple disabilities: A Delphi study: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 51(5) May 2007, 334-349.
  +
*Petry, K., Maes, B., & Vlaskamp, C. (2007). Support characteristics associated with the quality of life of people with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: The perspective of parents and direct support staff: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 104-110.
  +
*Pfeifer, M. (1989). A step in the right direction: Suggested strategies for implementing music therapy with the multihandicapped child: Music Therapy Perspectives Vol 6 1989, 57-60.
  +
*Pfister, G. (2004). Palliative care of the multiply disabled person: INFO Kara: Revue Internationale Francophone de Soins Palliatifs Vol 19(3) 2004, 125-128.
  +
*Piazza, C. C., Fisher, W. W., Hagopian, L. P., Bowman, L. G., & Toole, L. (1996). Using a choice assessment to predict reinforcer effectiveness: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 29(1) Spr 1996, 1-9.
  +
*Pierce, D., & Frank, G. (1992). A mother's work: Two levels of feminist analysis of family-centered care: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 46(11) Nov 1992, 972-980.
  +
*Porter, J., Ouvry, C., Morgan, M., & Downs, C. (2001). Interpreting the communication of people with profound and multiple learning difficulties: British Journal of Learning Disabilities Vol 29(1) Mar 2001, 12-16.
  +
*Potenski, D. H. (1993). Use of blacklight as visual stimulation for people with profound mental retardation and multiple handicaps: Mental Retardation Vol 31(2) Apr 1993, 111-115.
  +
*Potter, M. L. (1992). Research on teacher thinking: Implications for mainstreaming students with multiple handicaps: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 1992, 115-127.
  +
*Presland, J. (1989). Children with profound handicaps: A role for educational psychologists: AEP (Association of Educational Psychologists) Journal Vol 5(2) Jul 1989, 79-86.
  +
*Progar, P. R., North, S. T., Bruce, S. S., DiNovi, B. J., Nau, P. A., Eberman, E. M., et al. (2001). Putative behavioral history effects and aggression maintained by escape from therapists: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 34(1) Spr 2001, 69-72.
  +
*Radan, M. (1997). An interdisciplinary intervention model for multiply disabled children: Revue Roumaine de Psychologie Vol 41(1) Jan-Jun 1997, 45-58.
  +
*Rader, B., Shapiro, H. L., & Rodin, E. A. (1978). On placement of multiply handicapped clients into the open job market: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 39(10) Oct 1978, 299-302.
  +
*Raff-Lichtenberger, H. (2002). Outpatient music therapy: Service provision in a complex field: Musiktherapeutische Umschau Vol 23(4) 2002, 388-398.
  +
*Randall, J., Masalsky, C., & Luiselli, J. K. (2002). Behavioural intervention to increase oral food consumption in an adult with multiple disability and gastrostomy tube supplementation: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 27(1) Mar 2002, 5-13.
  +
*Ranieri, L., Ford, A., Vincent, L., & Brown, L. (1984). 1:1 versus 1:3 instruction of severely multihandicapped students: RASE: Remedial & Special Education Vol 5(5) Sep-Oct 1984, 23-28.
  +
*Realon, R. E., Favell, J. E., & Dayvault, K. A. (1988). Evaluating the use of adapted leisure materials on the engagement of persons who are profoundly, multiply handicapped: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 23(3) Sep 1988, 228-237.
  +
*Realon, R. E., Favell, J. E., & Lowerre, A. (1990). The effects of making choices on engagement levels with persons who are profoundly multiply handicapped: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 25(3) Sep 1990, 299-305.
  +
*Realon, R. E., & Konarski, E. A. (1993). Using decelerative contingencies to reduce the self-injurious behavior of people with multiple handicaps: The effects of response satiation? : Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 14(5) Sep-Oct 1993, 341-357.
  +
*Rees, R. J. (1991). The development of an assessment instrument for persons with severe and multiple disabilities: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 17(4) 1991, 413-416.
  +
*Rees, R. J., Home, C. J., & Beswick, M. (1995). The role of physical management and handling in facilitating skills acquisition and learning by people with severe and multiple disabilities: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 20(4) 1995, 313-325.
  +
*Reese, G. M., & Snell, M. E. (1991). Putting on and removing coats and jackets: The acquisition and maintenance of skills by children with severe multiple disabilities: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 26(4) Dec 1991, 398-410.
  +
*Reeves, M. (1979). Phases of parental coping with a handicapped child: Some practice considerations: School Social Work Quarterly Vol 1(4) Win 1979, 285-293.
  +
*Reid, D. H., Everson, J. M., & Green, C. W. (1999). A systematic evaluation of preferences identified through person-centered planning for people with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 32(4) Win 1999, 467-477.
  +
*Reid, D. H., Green, C. W., & Parsons, M. B. (1998). A comparison of supported work versus center-based program services on selected outcomes for individuals with multiple severe disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 23(1) Spr 1998, 69-76.
  +
*Reid, D. H., Green, C. W., & Parsons, M. B. (2003). An outcome management program for extending advances in choice research into choice opportunities for supported workers with severe multiple disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 36(4) Win 2003, 575-578.
  +
*Reid, D. H., & Hurlbut, B. (1977). Teaching nonvocal communication skills to multihandicapped retarded adults: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 10(4) Win 1977, 591-603.
  +
*Reid, D. H., Parsons, M. A., & Green, C. A. (1998). Identifying work peferences among individuals with severe multiple disabilities prior to beginning supported work: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 31(2) Sum 1998, 281-285.
  +
*Reid, D. H., Parsons, M. B., Green, C. W., & Browning, L. B. (2001). Increasing one aspect of self-determination among adults with severe multiple disabilities in supported work: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 34(3) Fal 2001, 341-344.
  +
*Reid, D. H., Phillips, J. F., & Green, C. W. (1991). Teaching persons with profound multiple handicaps: A review of the effects of behavioral research: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 24(2) Sum 1991, 319-336.
  +
*Reiman, J., Bullis, M., Davis, C., & Cole, A. B. (1991). "Lower-achieving" deaf people: Overview and case study: Volta Review Vol 93(5) Sep 1991, 99-120.
  +
*Remington, R. E., Foxen, T., & Hogg, J. (1977). Auditory reinforcement in profoundly retarded multiply handicapped children: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 82(3) Nov 1977, 299-304.
  +
*Rhoades, E. A., Price, F., & Perigoe, C. B. (2004). The Changing American Family & Ethnically Diverse Children with Hearing Loss and Multiple Needs: Volta Review Vol 104(4) 2004, 285-305.
  +
*Ribner, S., Bittlingmaier, B., & Breslin, E. T. (1976). A comparison of parent and teacher perceptions of the behavior of exceptional children: Journal of Educational Research Vol 69(9) May-Jun 1976, 345-348.
  +
*Richman, J. S., & Kozlowski, N. L. (1977). Operant training of head control and beginning language for a severely developmentally disabled child: Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry Vol 8(4) Dec 1977, 437-440.
  +
*Rider, R. A., & Candeletti, G. (1982). Influence of motor therapy on children with multisensory disabilities: A preliminary study: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 55(3, Pt 1) Dec 1982, 809-810.
  +
*Rieu, P., Tomkiewicz, S., Kafe, H., & Roland, T. (1971). Severe mental retardation: Study of 200 children admitted to the department for the chronic sick of the Paris Public Assistance: Revue de Neuropsychiatrie Infantile et d'Hygiene Mentale de l'Enfance Vol 19(3-4) Mar 1971, 115-149.
  +
*Rittenhouse, R. K. (1983). The acquisition of a functional vocabulary in severely disabled children using systematic sign language instruction: Journal of the American Deafness and Rehabilitation Association Vol 17(3) Dec 1983, 1-3.
  +
*Roberts, S., Arthur-Kelly, M., Foreman, P., & Pascoe, S. (2005). Educational approaches for maximizing arousal in children with multiple and severe disability: New directions for research and practice in early childhood contexts: Pediatric Rehabilitation Vol 8(2) Apr-Jun 2005, 88-91.
  +
*Robinson, R. O. (1973). The frequency of other handicaps in children with cerebral palsy: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 15(3) Jun 1973, 305-312.
  +
*Rodi, M. S., & Hughes, C. (2000). Teaching communication book use to a high school student using a milieu approach: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(3) Fal 2000, 175-179.
  +
*Rogow, S. M. (1973). Speech development and the blind multi-impaired child: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 5(4) Dec 1973, 105-109.
  +
*Rogow, S. M. (1980). Language development in blind multihandicapped children: A model of co-active intervention: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 6(5) Sep-Oct 1980, 301-308.
  +
*Rogow, S. M. (1982). Rhythms and rhymes: Developing communication in very young blind and multihandicapped children: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 8(5) Sep-Oct 1982, 249-260.
  +
*Rogow, S. M. (1994). Language development in a non-vocal child: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 20(5) Sep-Oct 1994, 339-348.
  +
*Rogow, S. W. (1984). The uses of social routines to facilitate communication in visually impaired and multihandicapped children: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 3(4) Jan 1984, 64-70.
  +
*Rohde, J., Farmer, R., Glover, G., & Nursey, A. (1989). A method of displaying assessment information about people with multiple handicaps as a disability profile: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 33(1) Feb 1989, 95-98.
  +
*Rose, K. C., White, J. A., Conroy, J., & Smith, D. M. (1993). Following the course of change: A study of adaptive and maladaptive behaviors in young adults living in the community: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 28(2) Jun 1993, 149-154.
  +
*Rosenbaum, P. L., Armstrong, R. W., & King, S. M. (1986). Improving attitudes toward the disabled: A randomized controlled trial of direct contact versus Kids-on-the-Block: Journal of Developmental & Behavioral Pediatrics Vol 7(5) Oct 1986, 302-307.
  +
*Rousey, A. B., Blacher, J. B., & Hanneman, R. A. (1990). Predictors of out-of-home placement of children with severe handicaps: A cross-sectional analysis: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 94(5) Mar 1990, 522-531.
  +
*Rowe, J. A., & Rapp, D. L. (1980). Tantrums: Remediation through communication: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 6(4) Jul-Aug 1980, 197-208.
  +
*Rowland, C. (1990). Communication in the classroom for children with dual sensory impairments: Studies of teacher and child behavior: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 6(4) Dec 1990, 262-274.
  +
*Rowland, C., & Schweigert, P. (1989). Tangible symbols: Symbolic communication for individuals with multisensory impairments: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 5(4) Dec 1989, 226-234.
  +
*Rowland, C., & Schweigert, P. (2000). Tangible symbols, tangible outcomes: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 16(2) Jun 2000, 61-78.
  +
*Rubin, J., & Klineman, J. (1974). They opened our eyes: The story of an exploratory art program for visually-impaired multiply-handicapped children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 6(4) Dec 1974, 106-113.
  +
*Rubin, J. A. (1975). Through art to affect: Blind children express their feelings: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 69(9) Nov 1975, 385-391.
  +
*Rudnitzki, G. (1988). Group Therapy with Disabled Young People: Effects of Modified Group-Analytic Techniques: Group Analysis Vol 21(2) Jun 1988, 169-178.
  +
*Rupprecht, W. (1984). Early intervention from a parent's viewpoint: Fruhforderung interdisziplinar Vol 3(4) 1984, 177-183.
  +
*Ryan, D., McGregor, F., Akermanis, M., Southwell, K., Ramke, M., & Woodyatt, G. (2004). Facilitating communication in children with multiple disabilities: Three case studies of girls with Rett syndrome: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 26(21-22) Nov 2004, 1268-1277.
  +
*Sacks, S. Z., Barrett, S. S., & Orlansky, M. D. (1997). People with multiple disabilities. New York, NY: American Foundation for the Blind.
  +
*Safford, P. L., Gregg, L. A., Schneider, G., & Sewell, J. M. (1976). A stimulation program for young sensory-impaired, multihandicapped children: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 11(1) Feb 1976, 12-17.
  +
*Sakaguchi, S. (1994). Attempt at communication guidance for complex severe handicaps--physical handicaps and mental retardation: Application of INREAL analysis to guidance for multiple handicaps: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 31(5) Mar 1994, 55-61.
  +
*Salisbury, C., & Evans, I. M. (1988). Comparison of parental involvement in regular and special education: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 13(4) Win 1988, 268-272.
  +
*Sandler, A. G., & McLain, S. C. (1987). Sensory reinforcement: Effects of response-contingent vestibular stimulation on multiply handicapped children: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 91(4) Jan 1987, 373-378.
  +
*Sasso, G. M., Hughes, G. G., Swanson, H. L., & Novak, C. G. (1987). A comparison of peer initiation interventions in promoting multiple peer initiators: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 22(3) Sep 1987, 150-155.
  +
*Sato, S. (2000). Motor skill training: Setting goals for children with cerebral palsy: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 38(1) Jun 2000, 41-51.
  +
*Saunders, M. D., Questad, K. A., Kedziorski, T. L., Boase, B. C., Patterson, E. A., & Cullinan, T. R. (2001). Unprompted mechanical switch use in individuals with severe multiple disabilities: An evaluation of the effects of body position: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 13(1) Mar 2001, 27-39.
  +
*Saunders, M. D., Smagner, J. P., & Saunders, R. R. (2003). Improving Methodological and Technological Analyses of Adaptive Switch Use of Individuals with Profound Multiple Impairments: Behavioral Interventions Vol 18(4) Nov 2003, 227-243.
  +
*Saunders, M. D., Timler, G. R., Cullinan, T. B., Pilkey, S., Questad, K. A., & Saunders, R. R. (2003). Evidence of contingency awareness in people with profound multiple impairments: Response duration versus response rate indicators: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 24(4) Jul-Aug 2003, 231 -245.
  +
*Saunders, R. R., Saunders, M. D., Struve, B., Munce, A. L., Olswang, L. B., Dowden, P. A., et al. (2007). Discovering indices of contingency awareness in adults with multiple profound disabilities: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 112(4) Jul 2007, 246-260.
  +
*Savaria, F., & Blanchette, F. (1986). Work integration project for mentally retarded and multihandicapped adults: Revue de Modification du Comportement Vol 16(2) Sum 1986, 77-83.
  +
*Scelles, R., Avant, M., Houssier, F., Maraquin, C., & Marty, F. (2005). Adolescence and polyhandicap: Views across the advenance of the subject: Neuropsychiatrie de l'Enfance et de l'Adolescence Vol 53(6) Oct 2005, 290-298.
  +
*Schanel-Klitsch, E., Ciner, E. B., Graboyes, M., & Appel, S. (1999). Visual evaluation of the multiply impaired: The success of the interdisciplinary team approach: RE:view Vol 31(1) Spr 1999, 9-16.
  +
*Schepis, M. M., & Reid, D. H. (1995). Effects of a voice output communication aid on interactions between support personnel and an individual with multiple disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 28(1) Spr 1995, 73-77.
  +
*Schiefelbusch, R. L. (1984). Speech, language and communication disorders of the multiple handicapped: Folia Phoniatrica Vol 36(1) Jan-Feb 1984, 8-23.
  +
*Schleien, S. J. (1991). Severe multiple disabilities. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc.
  +
*Schloss, P. J., Smith, M. A., Goldsmith, L., & Selinger, J. (1984). Identifying current and relevant curricular sequences for multiply involved hearing-impaired learners: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 129(4) Sep 1984, 370-374.
  +
*Schneider, N. (1986). Treatment and group therapy with dually diagnosed populations: Journal for Specialists in Group Work Vol 11(3) Sep 1986, 151-156.
  +
*Schoen, S. F. (1986). Decreasing noncompliance in a severely multihandicapped child: Psychology in the Schools Vol 23(1) Jan 1986, 88-94.
  +
*Schoen, S. F., & Thomas, R. (2006). Altering the inappropriate comments of a student with multiple disabilities: Journal of Instructional Psychology Vol 33(1) Mar 2006, 75-79.
  +
*Schum, R. (2004). Psychological Assessment of Children with Multiple Handicaps Who Have Hearing Loss: Volta Review Vol 104(4) 2004, 237-255.
  +
*Schwartzman, J. S. (2003). Rett syndrome: Revista Brasileira de Psiquiatria Vol 25(2) Jun 2003, 110-113.
  +
*Schweigert, P. (1989). Use of microswitch technology to facilitate social contingency awareness as a basis for early communication skills: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 5(3) Sep 1989, 192-198.
  +
*Schweigert, P., & Rowland, C. (1992). Early communication and microtechnology: Instructional sequence and case studies of children with severe multiple disabilities: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 8(4) Dec 1992, 273-286.
  +
*Search, D. L. (1974). A special short-term evaluation/training program for deaf-blind adults: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 68(10) Dec 1974, 444-446.
  +
*Sebba, J. (1988). Profound and multiple handicaps: Monitoring clients and their parents: Irish Journal of Psychology Vol 9(2) 1988, 286-308.
  +
*Seitz, S., & Marcus, S. (1976). Mother-child interactions: A foundation for language development: Exceptional Children Vol 42(8) May 1976, 445-449.
  +
*Selinske, J. E., Greer, R. D., & Lodhi, S. (1991). A functional analysis of the comprehensive application of behavior analysis to schooling: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 24(1) Spr 1991, 107-117.
  +
*Serber, S. L., Kumar, R., Woo, M. A., Macey, P. M., Fonarow, G. C., & Harper, R. M. (2008). Cognitive test performance and brain pathology: Nursing Research Vol 57(2) Mar-Apr 2008, 75-85.
  +
*Shapiro, E. S., Browder, D. M., & D'Huyvetters, K. K. (1984). Increasing academic productivity of severely multi-handicapped children with self-management: Idiosyncratic effects: Analysis & Intervention in Developmental Disabilities Vol 4(2) 1984, 171-188.
  +
*Shapiro, L. P., Gordon, R., & Neiditch, C. (1977). Documenting change in young multiply handicapped children in a rehabilitation center: The Journal of Special Education Vol 11(2) Sum 1977, 243-257.
  +
*Sharpe, P. (1990). An assessment of the cognitive abilities of multiply handicapped children: Adaptations of the Uzgiris and Hunt scales and their use with children in Britain and Singapore: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 16(6) Nov-Dec 1990, 335-353.
  +
*Shea, M. P., Salhani, D. P., Lewko, J. H., Boschen, K. A., & et al. (1993). Integrated Services for Northern Children: A network out-reach program for children with multiple service needs: Canadian Journal of Rehabilitation Vol 6(4) Sum 1993, 230-237.
  +
*Shearer, M. S., & Shearer, D. E. (1972). The Portage Project: A model for early childhood education: Exceptional Children Vol 39(3) Nov 1972, 210-217.
  +
*Shepard, C. H. (1976). Teaching language to mentally retarded deaf children: A review of the literature and a description of one classroom program: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 121(4) Aug 1976, 366-369.
  +
*Sigafoos, J., Penned, D., & Versluis, J. (1996). Naturalistic assessment leading to effective treatment of self-injury in a young boy with multiple disabilities: Education & Treatment of Children Vol 19(2) May 1996, 101-123.
  +
*Sigafoos, J., & Reichle, J. (1992). Comparing explicit to generalized requesting in an augmentative communication mode: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 1992, 167-188.
  +
*Sigafoos, J., Roberts, D., Couzens, D., & Kerr, M. (1993). Providing opportunities for choice-making and turn-taking to adults with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 5(4) Dec 1993, 297-310.
  +
*Sigafoos, J., & Souzens, D. (1995). Teaching functional use of an eye gaze communication board to a child with multiple disabilities: British Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 41(81, Pt 2) Jul 1995, 114-125.
  +
*Silva, D. A., Friedlander, B. Z., & Knight, M. S. (1978). Multihandicapped children's preferences for pure tones and speech stimuli as a method of assessing auditory capabilities: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 83(1) Jul 1978, 29-36.
  +
*Silverstein, L., Krasner, P. R., & Governale, R. (1982). Sensory feedback training to enable "blind hands to see": A pilot program with cerebral palsy children: American Journal of Clinical Biofeedback Vol 5(2) Fal-Win 1982, 131-137.
  +
*Silverstein, R. (1986). The legal necessity for residential schools serving deaf, blind, and multi-handicapped sensory-impaired children: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 131(2) Apr 1986, 78-84.
  +
*Sims, M., & Bridgman, G. (1984). Evaluation of progress using the context input process and product model: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 10(6) Nov-Dec 1984, 359-379.
  +
*Sinason, V. (1986). Secondary mental handicap and its relationship to trauma: Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy Vol 2(2) 1986, 131-154.
  +
*Sinason, V. (1988). Richard III, Hephaestus and Echo: Sexuality and mental/multiple handicap: Journal of Child Psychotherapy Vol 14(2) 1988, 93-105.
  +
*Sinason, V. (1999). The psychotherapeutic needs of the learning disabled and multiply disabled child. Florence, KY: Taylor & Frances/Routledge.
  +
*Singh, N. N., Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Molina, E. J., Adkins, A. D., & Oliva, D. (2003). Self-Determination During Mealtimes Through Microswitch Choice-Making by an Individual with Complex Multiple Disabilities and Profound Mental Retardation: Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions Vol 5(4) Fal 2003, 209-215.
  +
*Singh, N. N., Lancioni, G. E., Winton, A. S. W., Wahler, R. G., Singh, J., & Sage, M. (2004). Mindful caregiving increases happiness among individuals with profound multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 25(2) Mar-Apr 2004, 207-218.
  +
*Sinkkonen, J. (1994). Evaluation of mental health problems among Finnish hearing impaired children: Psychiatria Fennica Vol 25 1994, 52-65.
  +
*Sirotkin, S. A. (1979). The transition from gesture to word: Soviet Psychology Vol 17(3) Spr 1979, 46-59.
  +
*Sisson, L. A. (1992). Positive behavioral support: New foci in the management of challenging behaviors: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 86(8) Oct 1992, 364-369.
  +
*Sisson, L. A., Babeo, T. J., & Van Hasselt, V. B. (1988). Group training to increase social behaviors in young multihandicapped children: Behavior Modification Vol 12(4) Oct 1988, 497-524.
  +
*Sisson, L. A., & Dixon, M. J. (1990). Multiply disabled children. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, Inc.
  +
*Sisson, L. A., Kilwein, M. L., & Van Hasselt, V. B. (1988). A graduated guidance procedure for teaching self-dressing skills to multihandicapped children: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 9(4) 1988, 419-432.
  +
*Sisson, L. A., Van Hasselt, V. B., Hersen, M., & Aurand, J. C. (1988). Tripartite behavioral intervention to reduce stereotypic and disruptive behaviors in young multihandicapped children: Behavior Therapy Vol 19(4) Fal 1988, 503-526.
  +
*Sisson, L. A., Van Hasselt, V. B., Hersen, M., & Strain, P. S. (1985). Peer interventions: Increasing social behaviors in multihandicapped children: Behavior Modification Vol 9(3) Jul 1985, 293-321.
  +
*Smeets, P. M., & Striefel, S. (1975). The effects of different reinforcement conditions on the test performance of multihandicapped deaf children: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 8(1) Spr 1975, 83-89.
  +
*Smith, P. D., Gast, D. L., Logan, K. R., & Jacobs, H. A. (2001). Customizing instruction to maximize functional outcomes for students with profound multiple disabilities: Exceptionality Vol 9(3) 2001, 135-145.
  +
*Smith, T. (1983). Guidelines for working/playing with deaf-blind people: Readings in Deafness Mono 9 1983, 101-112.
  +
*Smith, V. K., & Prelock, P. A. (2002). A case management model for school-age children with multiple needs: Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools Vol 33(2) Apr 2002, 124-129.
  +
*Snart, F., & Hillyard, A. (1985). Staff ratios and allocated instructional time for multihandicapped students: Exceptional Children Vol 51(4) Jan 1985, 289-296.
  +
*Sobsey, R. (1983). Comparison of feeding whole and pureed foods to a multihandicapped adolescent: A case study: Mental Retardation & Learning Disability Bulletin Vol 11(2) 1983, 85-91.
  +
*Solarova, S. (1976). Are there students with multi-handicaps in every special education class? : Vierteljahresschrift fur Heilpadagogik und ihre Nachbargebiete Vol 45(3) Sep 1976, 265-270.
  +
*Sontag, E., Smith, J., & Sailor, W. (1977). The severely/profoundly handicapped: Who are they? Where are they? : The Journal of Special Education Vol 11(1) Spr 1977, 5-11.
  +
*Soodak, L. C., & Erwin, E. J. (2000). Valued member or tolerated participant: Parents' experiences in inclusive early childhood settings: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(1) Spr 2000, 29-41.
  +
*Sowers, J.-A., & Powers, L. (1995). Enhancing the participation and independence of students with severe physical and multiple disabilities in performing community activities: Mental Retardation Vol 33(4) Aug 1995, 209-220.
  +
*Speigel-McGill, P., Bambara, L. M., Shores, R. E., & Fox, J. J. (1984). The effects of proximity on socially oriented behaviors of severely multiply handicapped children: Education & Treatment of Children Vol 7(4) Fal 1984, 365-378.
  +
*Spiegel, B. B., Benjamin, B. J., & Spiegel, S. A. (1993). One method to increase spontaneous use of an assistive communication device: Case study: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 9(2) Jun 1993, 111-118.
  +
*St. Lawrence, J. S., & Drabman, R. S. (1984). Suppression of chronic high frequency spitting in a multiply handicapped and mentally retarded adolescent: Child & Family Behavior Therapy Vol 6(1) Spr 1984, 45-55.
  +
*Staub, D., & Hunt, P. (1993). The effects of social interaction training on high school peer tutors of schoolmates with severe disabilities: Exceptional Children Vol 60(1) Sep 1993, 41-57.
  +
*Stedt, J. D., & Palermo, D. S. (1983). The morale of teachers of multihandicapped and nonhandicapped children in a residential school for the deaf: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 128(3) Jun 1983, 383-387.
  +
*Steege, M. W., Wacker, D. P., Berg, W. K., Cigrand, K. K., & et al. (1989). The use of behavioral assessment to prescribe and evaluate treatments for severely handicapped children: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 22(1) Spr 1989, 23-33.
  +
*Stephenson, J. (2006). Music Therapy and the Education of Students with Severe Disabilities: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 41(3) Sep 2006, 290-299.
  +
*Straub, E. G. (1983). Independent living skills training for multihandicapped deaf adults: A residential approach: Readings in Deafness Mono 6 1983, 150-161.
  +
*Strawbridge, L. A., Drnach, M., Sisson, L. A., & Van Hasselt, V. B. (1989). Behavior therapy combined with physical therapy to promote walker use by a child with multiple handicaps: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 24(3) Sep 1989, 239-247.
  +
*Sunder, T. R. (1997). Meeting the challenge of epilepsy in persons with multiple handicaps: Journal of Child Neurology Vol 12(Suppl 1) Nov 1997, S38-S43.
  +
*Syme, J., & Wilton, K. (1987). Perceptions of a community program for multiply handicapped blind young adults: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 81(2) Feb 1987, 59-60.
  +
*Tait, P. E., & Ward, M. (1987). When a student dies: Helping teachers who grieve: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 18(4) Win 1987, 151-156.
  +
*Tang, J.-C., Patterson, T. G., & Kennedy, C. H. (2003). Identifying specific sensory modalities maintaining the stereotypy of students with multiple profound disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 24(6) Nov-Dec 2003, 433-451.
  +
*Tarnowski, K. J., & Drabman, R. S. (1985). The effects of ambulation training on the self-stimulatory behavior of a multiply handicapped child: Behavior Therapy Vol 16(3) Jun 1985, 275-285.
  +
*Tawney, J. W., & Demchak, M. A. (1984). Severely retarded? Severely handicapped? Multiply handicapped? A definitional analysis: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 4(3) Fal 1984, 1-18.
  +
*Taylor, B., & Taylor, A. (1996). A wayfinding perspective in mental health: Generating a sense of community among people with multiple handicapping conditions: Psychiatric Rehabilitation Journal Vol 20(2) Oct 1996, 77-81.
  +
*Taylor, J. C., Ekdahl, M. M., Romanczyk, R. G., & Miller, M. L. (1994). Escape behavior in task situations: Task versus social antecedents: Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders Vol 24(3) Jun 1994, 331-344.
  +
*Taylor, J. C., McKelvey, J. L., & Sisson, L. A. (1993). Community-referenced leisure skill clusters for adolescents with multiple disabilities: Journal of Behavioral Education Vol 3(4) Dec 1993, 363-386.
  +
*Taylor, J. C., Sisson, L. A., McKelvey, J. L., & Trefelner, M. F. (1993). Situation specificity in attention-seeking problem behavior: A case study: Behavior Modification Vol 17(4) Oct 1993, 474-497.
  +
*Tedder, N. (1983). They're not all Helen Kellers: Readings in Deafness Mono 8 May 1983, 17-20.
  +
*Theunissen, G. (1986). The future of adults with severe mental and multiple disabilities: Behindertenpadagogik Vol 25(1) Feb 1986, 23-34.
  +
*Thoma, C. A., Rogan, P., & Baker, S. R. (2001). Student involvement in transition planning: Unheard voices: Education & Training in Mental Retardation & Developmental Disabilities Vol 36(1) Mar 2001, 16-29.
  +
*Thompson, R. J. (1977). Applied behavior analysis in the treatment of mealtime tantrums and delay in self feeding in a multi-handicapped child: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 6(3) Win 1977, 52-54.
  +
*Tillinghast, J. (1977). Developmental arts for exceptional children: Program report: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 6(3) Win 1977, 96-97.
  +
*Timokhin, V. V. (1988). International problems of caring for the hearing impaired children with primary disorders of intellectual or physical development: Defektologiya No 6 1988, 68-71.
  +
*Todis, B., & Singer, G. (1991). Stress and stress management in families with adopted children who have severe disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 16(1) Spr 1991, 3-13.
  +
*Tomasik, M. (2007). Effective inclusion activities for high school students with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 657-659.
  +
*Tomkiewicz, S. (1975). Epidemiological survey: Parisian children with multiple handicaps or severely handicapped: Revue de Neuropsychiatrie Infantile et d'Hygiene Mentale de l'Enfance Vol 23(7) Jul 1975, 389-403.
  +
*Tomkiewicz, S., Biny, Y., & Zucman, E. (1971). Specialized family placement for severely retarded children: Analysis of four years of activity: Revue de Neuropsychiatrie Infantile et d'Hygiene Mentale de l'Enfance Vol 19(3-4) Mar 1971, 165-175.
  +
*Tota, A., Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., & Oliva, D. (2006). Evaluating the applicability of optic microswitches for eyelid responses in students with profound multiple disabilities: Disability and Rehabilitation: Assistive Technology Vol 1(4) Sep 2006, 217-223.
  +
*Towfighy-Hooshyar, N., & Zingle, H. W. (1984). Regular-class students' attitudes toward integrated multiply handicapped peers: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 88(6) May 1984, 630-637.
  +
*Townsend, A., Wyke, S., & Hunt, K. (2006). Self-managing and managing self: Practical and moral dilemmas in accounts of living with chronic illness: Chronic Illness Vol 2(3) Sep 2006, 185-194.
  +
*Trefler, E., Nickey, J., & Hobson, D. A. (1983). Technology in the education of multiply-handicapped children: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 37(6) Jun 1983, 381-387.
  +
*Tretakoff, M. I. (1977). The evolution of programs for blind mentally retarded children in residential facilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 71(1) Jan 1977, 29-33.
  +
*Trief, E. (2007). The use of tangible cues for children with multiple disabilities and visual impairment: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 613-619.
  +
*Trief, E., De Lisi, L., Cravello, R., & Yu, Z. (2007). A profile of orientation and mobility instruction with a student with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 620-625.
  +
*Troster, H., Brambring, M., & Van der Burg, J. (1995). Sleep disorders in visually impaired infants and preschoolers: Praxis der Kinderpsychologie und Kinderpsychiatrie Vol 44(2) Feb 1995, 36-44.
  +
*Tucker, D. J., & Berry, G. W. (1980). Teaching severely multihandicapped students to put on their own hearing aids: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 13(1) Spr 1980, 65-75.
  +
*Tucker, M., Sigafoos, J., & Bushell, H. (1998). Analysis of conditions associated with low rates of challenging behaviour in two adolescents with multiple disabilities: Behaviour Change Vol 15(2) 1998, 126-139.
  +
*Tucker, P. J., & Kretschmer, R. R. (1999). How adult beliefs shape the speech communities of a child who has multiple disabilities: Mental Retardation Vol 37(5) Oct 1999, 395-406.
  +
*Tweedie, D. (1974). Behavioral change in a deaf-blind multihandicapped child: Volta Review Vol 76(4) Apr 1974, 213-218.
  +
*Tweedie, D. (1974). Demonstrating behavioral change of deaf-blind children: Exceptional Children Vol 40(7) Apr 1974, 510-512.
  +
*Tweedie, D. (1974). Observing the communication behavior of deaf-blind children: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 119(3) Jun 1974, 342-347.
  +
*Tweedie, D. (1975). Videoaudiometry: A possible procedure for "difficult-to-test" populations: Volta Review Vol 77(2) Feb 1975, 129-134.
  +
*Tweedle, D. (1975). Identification and documentation of audio-behavioral responses in a deaf-blind multihandicapped population through the use of videotape: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 7(4) Dec 1975, 108-111.
  +
*Tynan, W. D., Asp, K. S., Serper, L., & Emory, E. K. (1985). Student volunteer social support and infant intervention: A case study: Infant Mental Health Journal Vol 6(4) Win 1985, 204-209.
  +
*Udvari-Solner, A. (1996). Theoretical influences on the establishment of inclusive practices: Cambridge Journal of Education Vol 26(1) 1996, 101-119.
  +
*Uslan, M. M., Malone, S., & de l'Aune, W. (1983). Teaching route travel to multiply handicapped blind adults: An auditory approach: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 77(1) Jan 1983, 18-20.
  +
*Vacola, G. (1987). About young, multihandicapped individuals: Their affective and sexual life: Psychologie Medicale Vol 19(6) Apr 1987, 895-897.
  +
*Vacola, G. (1987). A language for deaf psychotics and their family: Annales Medico-Psychologiques Vol 145(4) Apr 1987, 372-378.
  +
*Valcante, G., Roberson, W., Reid, W. R., & Wolking, W. D. (1989). Effects of wait-time and intertrial interval durations on learning by children with multiple handicaps: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 22(1) Spr 1989, 43-55.
  +
*van Baar, A. L., van Wassenaer, A. G., Briet, J. M., Dekker, F. W., & Kok, J. H. (2005). Very Preterm Birth is Associated with Disabilities in Multiple Developmental Domains: Journal of Pediatric Psychology Vol 30(3) Apr 2005, 247-255.
  +
*van den Broek, E. G. C., Janssen, C. G. C., van Ramshorst, T., & Deen, L. (2006). Visual impairments in people with severe and profound multiple disabilities: An inventory of visual functioning: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 50(6) Jun 2006, 470-475.
  +
*Van den Pol, R. A., & et al. (1981). Teaching the handicapped to eat in public places: Acquisition, generalization, and maintenance of restaurant skills: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 14(1) Spr 1981, 61-69.
  +
*van der Putten, A., Reynders, K., Vlaskamp, C., & Nakken, H. (2004). A Functionally Focused Curriculum for Children with Profound Multiple Disabilities: A Goal Analysis: Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 17(2) Jun 2004, 71-75.
  +
*Van der Putten, A., Vlaskamp, C., Reynders, K., & Nakken, H. (2005). Children with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: The effects of functional movement activities: Clinical Rehabilitation Vol 19(6) Sep 2005, 613-620.
  +
*Van der Putten, A., Vlaskamp, C., Reynders, K., & Nakken, H. (2005). Movement skill assessment in children with profound multiple disabilities: A psychometric analysis of the Top Down Motor Milestone Test: Clinical Rehabilitation Vol 19(6) Sep 2005, 635-643.
  +
*Van Dijk, J. (1990). The Sint-Michielsgestel approach to diagnosis and education of multisensory impaired persons: Defektologiya No 1 1990, 67-75.
  +
*Van Hasselt, V. B., Sisson, L. A., & Aach, S. R. (1987). Parent training to increase compliance in a young multihandicapped child: Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry Vol 18(3) Sep 1987, 275-283.
  +
*Van Houten, R., & Rolider, A. (1988). Recreating the scene: An effective way to provide delayed punishment for inappropriate motor behavior: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 21(2) Sum 1988, 187-192.
  +
*Varas Martin, F. J. (1988). Psychopedagogy and group intervention: Clinica y Analisis Grupal Vol 10(2)[48] May-Aug 1988, 261-279.
  +
*Vaz, I. (1995). Personal health record for school children with multiple needs: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 21(3) May 1995, 191-198.
  +
*Vernon, M., Bair, R., & Lotz, S. (1979). Psychological evaluation and testing of children who are deaf-blind: School Psychology Review Vol 8(3) Sum 1979, 291-295.
  +
*Visser, H. M., Dekker, J., Hartevelt-Bosma, L., Rijnierse, P., & De Jonghe, F. (2006). Intakes for (day) clinical psychotherapy. A cohort study: Tijdschrift voor Psychiatrie Vol 48(2) 2006, 141-145.
  +
*Vlaskamp, C. (1993). Development and evaluation of individual educational care programs for profoundly multiple handicapped persons: Issues in Special Education & Rehabilitation Vol 8(1) 1993, 45-50.
  +
*Vlaskamp, C., & Cuppen-Fonteine, H. (2007). Reliability of assessing the sensory perception of children with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: A case study: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 33(5) Sep 2007, 547-551.
  +
*Vlaskamp, C., de Geeter, K. I., Huijsmans, L. M., & Smit, I. H. (2003). Passive Activities: the Effectiveness of Multisensory Environments on the Level of Activity of Individuals with Profound Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 16(2) Jun 2003, 135-143.
  +
*Vlaskamp, C., Hiemstra, S. J., & Wiersma, L. A. (2007). Becoming aware of what you know or need to know: Gathering client and context characteristics in day services for persons with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 97-103.
  +
*Vlaskamp, C., Hiemstra, S. J., Wiersma, L. A., & Zijlstra, B. J. H. (2007). Extent, duration, and content of day services' activities for persons with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 152-159.
  +
*Vlaskamp, C., & Nakken, H. (1999). Missing in execution: Therapies and activities for individuals with profound multiple disabilities: British Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 45(89, Pt 2) Jul 1999, 99-109.
  +
*Voelker, S., Shore, D., Hakim-Larson, J., & Bruner, D. (1997). Discrepancies in parent and teacher ratings of adaptive behavior of children with multiple disabilities: Mental Retardation Vol 35(1) Feb 1997, 10-17.
  +
*von Wendt, L., & et al. (1985). Cerebral palsy and additional handicaps in a 1-year birth cohort from northern Finland: A prospective follow-up study to the age of 14 years: Annals of Clinical Research Vol 17(4) 1985, 156-161.
  +
*Wacker, D. P., & et al. (1985). Evaluation of reinforcer preferences for profoundly handicapped students: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 18(2) Sum 1985, 173-178.
  +
*Wacker, D. P., Harper, D. C., Powell, W. J., & Healy, A. (1983). Life outcomes and satisfaction ratings of multihandicapped adults: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 25(5) Oct 1983, 625-631.
  +
*Wacker, D. P., Wiggins, B., Fowler, M., & Berg, W. K. (1988). Training students with profound or multiple handicaps to make requests via microswitches: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 21(4) Win 1988, 331-343.
  +
*Wakefield, D. (2005). Profound and Multiple Learning Difficulties: Educational Psychology in Practice Vol 21(4) Dec 2005, 353-354.
  +
*Wanke-Greiner, K. (2005). Relationship work using songs. Aspects of developmental psychology in singing with multiple disordered adults: Musiktherapeutische Umschau Vol 26(2) 2005, 130-139.
  +
*Ward, J. L. (1981). A program for dependent handicapped students within the Calgary Catholic School Board: Mental Retardation Bulletin Vol 9(2-3) 1981, 97-111.
  +
*Watkins, L. T., Sprafkin, J. N., & Krolikowski, D. M. (1993). Using videotaped lessons to facilitate the development of manual sign skills in students with mental retardation: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 9(3) Sep 1993, 177-183.
  +
*Wehmeyer, M. L. (2005). Self-determination and individuals with severe disabilities: Re-examining meanings and misinterpretations: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 30(3) Fal 2005, 113-120.
  +
*Welsh, R. L. (1985). Summer program of the Maryland School for the Blind: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(7) Sep 1985, 318.
  +
*Wheeler, J. J., Carter, S. L., Mayton, M. R., & Thomas, R. A. (2002). Structural analysis of instructional variables and their effects on task-engagement and self-aggression: Education & Training in Mental Retardation & Developmental Disabilities Vol 37(4) Dec 2002, 391-398.
  +
*Whelan, E. M., & Kretschmer, R. E. (1996). Hearing-impaired students with multiple disabilities as people who think, communicate, and feel: Volta Review Vol 98(5) Nov 1996, 221-232.
  +
*Wiebel, I., & Spies, F. (1983). Panel 6: Early intervention with children with multiple and/or massive disabilities: Fruhforderung interdisziplinar Vol 2(3) Jul-Sep 1983, 122-124.
  +
*Wilder, J., Axelsson, C., & Granlund, M. (2004). Parent-child interaction: A comparison of parents' perceptions in three groups: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 26(21-22) Nov 2004, 1313-1322.
  +
*Wilder, J., & Granlund, M. (2003). Behaviour style and interaction between seven children with multiple disabilities and their caregivers: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 29(6) Nov 2003, 559-567.
  +
*William, J., Rickert, V., Hogan, J., Zolten, A. J., & et al. (1995). Children's Color Trails: Archives of Clinical Neuropsychology Vol 10(3) May-Jun 1995, 211-223.
  +
*Williams, J. K. (1990). Consumer skills for multiply handicapped students with low vision: RE:view Vol 21(4) Win 1990, 234-235.
  +
*Williams, T. (1985). The Mary Sheridan Unit: An evaluation of the effects of a hospital unit on the development of visually-impaired multiply handicapped children: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 11(1) Jan-Feb 1985, 1-12.
  +
*Wilson, D. A. (1974). Teaching multiply handicapped blind persons in a state hospital: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 68(8) Oct 1974, 337-343.
  +
*Wilson, P. G., Cuvo, A. J., & Davis, P. K. (1986). Training a functional skill cluster: Nutritious meal planning within a budget, grocery list writing, and shopping: Analysis & Intervention in Developmental Disabilities Vol 6(3) 1986, 179-201.
  +
*Winnett, R. L. (1989). Long-term care reconsidered: The role of the psychologist in the geriatric rehabilitation milieu: Journal of Applied Gerontology Vol 8(1) Mar 1989, 53-68.
  +
*Wittenstein, S. H. (1993). A parent-professional collaboration model of transitional planning: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 87(6) Jun 1993, 227-229.
  +
*Woods, G. E. (1979). Visual problems in the handicapped child: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 5(5) Sep-Oct 1979, 303-322.
  +
*Woods, R. W., & Lindsey, J. D. (1994). Perceived and actual mathematical competencies of children with visual impairments and learning disabilities: Psychological Reports Vol 74(1) Feb 1994, 238.
  +
*Wouters, H., Fonteyne, A., Lagae, L., & Stiers, P. (2006). Specific memory impairment in a multiple disabled male with fragile X syndrome and temporal lobe epilepsy: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 48(5) May 2006, 378-382.
  +
*Yarnall, G. D. (1983). Comparison of operant and conventional audiometric procedures with multihandicapped (deaf-blind) children: Volta Review Vol 85(2) Feb-Mar 1983, 69-82.
  +
*Young, K. R., West, R. P., Howard, V. F., & Whitney, R. (1986). Acquisition, fluency training, generalization, and maintenance of dressing skills of two developmentally disabled children: Education & Treatment of Children Vol 9(1) Feb 1986, 16-29.
  +
*Yuker, H. E. (1988). Perceptions of severely and multiply disabled persons: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 1(1) Mar 1988, 5-16.
  +
*Zalsman, G., & Cohen, D. J. (1998). Multiplex developmental disorder: Israel Journal of Psychiatry and Related Sciences Vol 35(4) 1998, 300-306.
  +
*Zanier, D. J., McPhail, P. J., & Voelker, S. L. (1989). A microcomputer-aided mobility training program for the multiply handicapped: Mental Retardation & Learning Disability Bulletin Vol 17(1) 1989, 51-62.
  +
*Ziev, J. D., Johnson, P. I., & Schein, J. D. (1989). An empirical demonstration of the case-management approach to rehabilitation of multiply sensorially disabled clients: Journal of the American Deafness and Rehabilitation Association Vol 22(4) Apr 1989, 86-93.
  +
*Zijlstra, H. P., & Vlaskamp, C. (2005). The Impact of Medical Conditions on the Support of Children with Profound Intellectual and Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 18(2) Jun 2005, 151-161.
  +
*Zijlstra, H. P., & Vlaskamp, C. (2005). Leisure provision for persons with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Quality time or killing time? : Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 49(6) Jun 2005, 434-448.
   
 
===Single case studies===
 
===Single case studies===

Latest revision as of 17:56, 10 January 2009

Assessment | Biopsychology | Comparative | Cognitive | Developmental | Language | Individual differences | Personality | Philosophy | Social |
Methods | Statistics | Clinical | Educational | Industrial | Professional items | World psychology |

Clinical: Approaches · Group therapy · Techniques · Types of problem · Areas of specialism · Taxonomies · Therapeutic issues · Modes of delivery · Model translation project · Personal experiences ·


People with multiple disabilities require careful assessment and treatment to ensure that the complexity of their difficulties are properly addressed.


Epidemiology

Assessment

Managment and treatment

Effects on the family

See also


References

Books

  • Algozzine, B., & Ysseldyke, J. (2006). Teaching students with medical, physical, and multiple disabilities: A practical guide for every teacher. Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.
  • Bozic, N., & Murdoch, H. (1996). Learning through interaction: Technology and children with multiple disabilities. London, England: David Fulton Publishers.
  • Bozic, N., & Sherlock, C. (1996). Joint activities and early functional communication. London, England: David Fulton Publishers.
  • Carney, I. H., & Gamel-McCormick, M. (1996). Working with families. Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Correa, V. I. (1996). Students with multiple disabilities. Springfield, IL, England: Charles C Thomas, Publisher.
  • Davidson, P. W., & Dolins, M. (1993). Assessment of the young child with visual impairment and multiple disabilities. Austin, TX: Pro-Ed.
  • Detheridge, T. (1996). Developing information technology competencies. London, England: David Fulton Publishers.
  • Downing, J. E. (2005). Teaching communication skills to students with severe disabilities (2nd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Dunn, W. (1996). The sensorimotor systems: A framework for assessment and intervention. Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Dunst, C. J., & McWilliam, R. A. (1988). Cognitive assessment of multiply handicapped young children. New York, NY: Plenum Press.
  • Fisher, D., & Thursfield, C. (1996). Augmentative communication. London, England: David Fulton Publishers.
  • Fowler, S. (2007). Sensory stimulation: Sensory-focused activities for people with physical and multiple disabilities. London, England: Jessica Kingsley Publishers.
  • Hammer, E. K. (1989). Research issues in educating visually handicapped persons with multiple impairments. Elmsford, NY: Pergamon Press.
  • Hart, V. (1988). Multiply disabled children. Elmsford, NY: Pergamon Press.
  • Hodkinson, M. (1988). Multiple disabilities. Oxford, England: Heinemann Medical Books/Heinemann Professional Publishing.
  • Jones, C. J. (1988). Evaluation and educational programming of deaf-blind/severely multihandicapped students: Sensorimotor stage. Springfield, IL, England: Charles C Thomas, Publisher.
  • Jones, C. J. (1993). Case studies of severely/multihandicapped students. Springfield, IL, England: Charles C Thomas, Publisher.
  • Knoors, H., & Vervloed, M. P. J. (2003). Educational programming for deaf children with multiple disabilities: Accommodating special needs. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
  • Leifield, L., & Murray, T. (1995). Advocating for Aric: Strategies for full inclusion. Albany, NY: State University of New York Press.
  • Leong, C. K. (1987). Children with specific reading disabilities. Lisse, Netherlands: Swets & Zeitlinger Publishers.
  • Lewis, K. S. (1998). Lost child: Therapeutic work with a mother of an infant with severe learning disabilites. Philadelphia, PA: Whurr Publishers.
  • Markle, M. (2004). Difficult journeys. Boston, MA: Trumpeter Books.
  • Nakken, H., van Wijck, R., & Vlaskamp, C. (1994). Play within an intervention for multiply handicapped children. Albany, NY: State University of New York Press.
  • Nisbet, P. (1996). The experience of mobility. London, England: David Fulton Publishers.
  • Orelove, F. P., & Malatchi, A. (1996). Curriculum and instruction. Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Orelove, F. P., & Sobsey, D. (1991). Educating children with multiple disabilities: A transdisciplinary approach (2nd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Orelove, F. P., & Sobsey, D. (1996). Educating children with multiple disabilities: A transdisciplinary approach (3rd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Reavis, D., & Sagebiel, D. (1990). Assessing students with multiple disabilities: Practical guidelines for practitioners. Springfield, IL, England: Charles C Thomas, Publisher.
  • Reichle, J. E., York, J., & Sigafoos, J. (1991). Implementing augmentative and alternative communication: Strategies for learners with severe disabilities. Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Ruben, D. H. (1993). Transitional living centers for the multiply disabled. Westport, CT: Praeger Publishers/Greenwood Publishing Group.
  • Ruth, R. (1995). Long-term therapy with a disagreeable man. Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Sobsey, D., & Cox, A. W. (1996). Integrating health care and educational programs. Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Sobsey, D., & Thuppal, M. (1996). Children with special health care needs. Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Sobsey, D., & Wolf-Schein, E. (1996). Children with sensory impairments. Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • Vlaskamp, C. (2005). Assessing people with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishing.
  • Vlaskamp, C. (2005). Interdisciplinary assessment of people with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishing.
  • Wehman, P. (2006). Life beyond the classroom: Transition strategies for young people with disabilities (4th ed.). Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • York, J., & Rainforth, B. (1991). Developing instructional adaptations. Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.
  • York-Barr, J., Rainforth, B., & Locke, P. (1996). Developing instructional adaptations. Baltimore, MD: Paul H Brookes Publishing.

Papers

  • Adelinis, J. D., Piazza, C. C., & Goh, H.-L. (2001). Treatment of multiply controlled destructive behavior with food reinforcement: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 34(1) Spr 2001, 97-100.
  • Adelson-Bernstein, N., & Sandow, L. (1978). Teaching buttoning to severely/profoundly retarded multihandicapped children: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 13(2) Apr 1978, 178-183.
  • Adlem, A., Arco, L., & Ngan, C. (1990). An analysis of independent engagement of persons with profound multiple handicaps: Behaviour Change Vol 7(4) 1990, 185-195.
  • Adlem, A., & MacDonald, D. (1992). Covariation of stereotyped behaviour and engagement: Behaviour Change Vol 9(1) 1992, 8-13.
  • Agran, M., & Alper, S. (2000). Curriculum and instruction in general education: Implications for service delivery and teacher preparation: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(3) Fal 2000, 167-174.
  • Agrotou, A. (1994). Isolation and the multi-handicapped patient: An analysis of the music therapist-patient affects and processes: The Arts in Psychotherapy Vol 21(5) 1994, 359-365.
  • Aitken, S. (1988). Computer-aided instruction with the multiply impaired: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 32(4) Aug 1988, 257-263.
  • Ammerman, R. T., Lubetsky, M. J., Hersen, M., & Van Hasselt, V. B. (1988). Maltreatment of children and adolescents with multiple handicaps: Five case examples: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 1(2) Jun 1988, 129-139.
  • Ammerman, R. T., Van Hasselt, V. B., Hersen, M., McGonigle, J. J., & et al. (1989). Abuse and neglect in psychiatrically hospitalized multihandicapped children: Child Abuse & Neglect Vol 13(3) 1989, 335-343.
  • Andrew, A. K. (1989). Meeting the needs of young deaf-blind children and their parents: I: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 15(3) May-Jun 1989, 195-206.
  • Antonijevic, M. (1974). The family of a deaf-mute child: Psihijatrija Danas Vol 6(2-3) 1974, 163-169.
  • Arain, A., Shihabuddin, B., Niaz, F., Modur, P., Taylor, H., Fakhoury, T., et al. (2006). Epilepsy and the Impact of an Epileptology Clinic for Patients with Mental Retardation and Associated Disabilities in an Institutional Setting: Epilepsia Vol 47(12) Dec 2006, 2052-2057.
  • Arthur, M. (2003). Socio-Communicative Variables and Behavior States in Students with Profound and Multiple Disabilities: Descriptive Data from School Settings: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 38(2) Jun 2003, 200-219.
  • Arthur, M. (2004). Patterns amongst behavior states, sociocommunicative, and activity variables in educational programs for students with profound and multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 16(2) Jun 2004, 125-149.
  • Arthur-Kelly, M., Bochner, S., Center, Y., & Mok, M. (2007). Socio-communicative perspectives on research and evidence-based practice in the education of students with profound and multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 19(3) Jun 2007, 161-176.
  • Ashby, M., Lindsay, W. R., Pitcaithly, D., Broxholme, S., & Geelen, N. (1995). Snoezelen: Its effects on concentration and responsiveness in people with profound multiple handicaps: British Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 58(7) Jul 1995, 303-307.
  • Bagnato, S. J. (1984). Team congruence in developmental diagnosis and intervention: Comparing clinical judgment and child performance measures: School Psychology Review Vol 13(1) Win 1984, 7-16.
  • Bagnato, S. J., & Neisworth, J. T. (1980). The Intervention Efficiency Index: An approach to preschool program accountability: Exceptional Children Vol 46(4) Jan 1980, 264-269.
  • Bailey, B. R., & Downing, J. (1994). Using visual accents to enhance attending to communication symbols for students with severe multiple disabilities: RE:view Vol 26(3) Fal 1994, 101-118.
  • Bailey, B. R., & Head, D. N. (1993). Providing O&M services to children and youth with severe multiple disabilities: RE:view Vol 25(2) Sum 1993, 57-66.
  • Bailey, B. R., & Murray-Branch, J. (1993). Collaborative communication programming: Providing a meaning-based curriculum to students with severe multiple disabilities: Journal of Educational & Psychological Consultation Vol 4(1) 1993, 29-47.
  • Bailey, L., & Slee, P. T. (1984). A comparison of play interactions between non-disabled and disabled children and their mothers: A question of style: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 10(1) Mar 1984, 5-10.
  • Bailey, R. L., & Angell, M. E. (2005). Improving Feeding Skills and Mealtime Behaviors in Children and Youth with Disabilities: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 40(1) Mar 2005, 80-96.
  • Baker, D. J., Fox, J., & Albin, R. W. (1995). Staff support strategies to increase the involvement of individuals with disabilities in meal preparation: Behavioral Interventions Vol 10(4) Oct 1995, 197-210.
  • Bartlett, C. H., & O'Grady, D. J. (1976). Negotiating educational programs for children with developmental disorders: Assessment, interpretation, demonstration, support (AIDS): Child Psychiatry & Human Development Vol 7(1) Fal 1976, 43-55.
  • Barton, L. E., & Barton, C. L. (1985). An effective and benign treatment of rumination: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 10(3) Fal 1985, 168-171.
  • Barton, L. E., Johnson, H. A., & Brulle, A. R. (1986). An evaluation of the effectiveness of an extended year program: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 11(2) Sum 1986, 136-138.
  • Barton, L. E., Repp, A. C., & Brulle, A. R. (1985). Reduction of stereotypic behaviours using differential reinforcement procedures and momentary restraint: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 29(1) Mar 1985, 71-79.
  • Basilova, T. A. (1988). Organization of education for the blind-deaf children abroad: Defektologiya No 5 1988, 65-70.
  • Beail, N. (1985). A comparative study of profoundly multiply handicapped children's scores on the Bayley and the Griffiths developmental scales: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 11(1) Jan-Feb 1985, 31-36.
  • Beail, N. (1985). The nature of interactions between nursing staff and profoundly multiply handicapped children: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 11(3) May-Jun 1985, 113-129.
  • Beange, H., Gale, L., & Stewart, L. (1995). Project renourish: A dietary intervention to improve nutritional status in people with multiple disabilities: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 20(3) 1995, 165-174.
  • Becker, H., Schur, S., & Hammer, E. (1987). Monitoring and tracking clients and helpers: A system for matching disabled students with adult services: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 19(2) Sum 1987, 53-63.
  • Beckung, E., Steffenburg, U., & Uvebrant, P. (1997). Motor and sensory dysfunctions in children with mental retardation and epilepsy: Seizure Vol 6(1) Mar 1997, 43-50.
  • Behrmann, M. M., & Lahm, L. (1984). Babies and robots: Technology to assist learning of young multiply disabled children: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 45(7-8) Jul-Aug 1984, 194-201.
  • Benedict, M. I., White, R. B., Wulff, L. M., & Hall, B. J. (1990). Reported maltreatment in children with multiple disabilities: Child Abuse & Neglect Vol 14(2) 1990, 207-217.
  • Benedict, M. I., Wulff, L. M., & White, R. B. (1992). Current parental stress in maltreating and nonmaltreating families of children with multiple disabilities: Child Abuse & Neglect Vol 16(2) 1992, 155-163.
  • Bennett, D. L., Gast, D. L., Wolery, M., & Schuster, J. (1986). Time delay and system of least prompts: A comparison in teaching manual sign production: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 21(2) Jun 1986, 117-129.
  • Benton, R. B., Permenter, N. A., Baylor, J., & McLelland, P. (1974). Evaluating the work potential of blind multiply handicapped persons for the manufacture of bath perfume: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 68(1) Jan 1974, 20-24.
  • Berg, W. K., & Wacker, D. P. (1989). Evaluation of tactile prompts with a student who is deaf, blind, and mentally retarded: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 22(1) Spr 1989, 93-99.
  • Berg, W. K., Wacker, D. P., Ebbers, B., Wiggins, B., & et al. (1995). A demonstration of generalization of performance across settings, materials, and motor responses for students with profound mental retardation: Behavior Modification Vol 19(1) Jan 1995, 119-143.
  • Bergel, R. R. (1981). Individual assessment procedures for multihandicapped and implementation of a sports program: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 4(3) Sep 1981, 365-378.
  • Berry, J. O. (1983). Adlerian family counseling: A strengths approach: Individual Psychology: Journal of Adlerian Theory, Research & Practice Vol 39(4) Dec 1983, 419-424.
  • Bertram, B. (2004). Cochlear Implantation for Children with Hearing Loss and Multiple Disabilities: An Evaluation from an Educator's Perspective: Volta Review Vol 104(4) 2004, 349-359.
  • Besden, C. (2007). Design and implementation of an orientation and mobility program for a young woman with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 625-627.
  • Betts, D. J. (2003). Developing a Projective Drawing Test: Experiences with the face stimulus assessment (FSA): Art Therapy Vol 20(2) 2003, 77-82.
  • Billingsley, F. F., & Neel, R. S. (1985). Competing behaviors and their effects on skill generalization and maintenance: Analysis & Intervention in Developmental Disabilities Vol 5(4) 1985, 357-372.
  • Blacher, J., & Baker, B. L. (1987). Dry-bed training for nocturnal enuresis in three children with multiple problems: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 16(3) Sep 1987, 240-244.
  • Black, D. W., Winokur, G., Bell, S., Nasrallah, A., & et al. (1988). Complicated mania: Comorbidity and immediate outcome in the treatment of mania: Archives of General Psychiatry Vol 45(3) Mar 1988, 232-236.
  • Black, J. W., & Meyer, L. H. (1992). But... is it really work? Social validity of employment training for persons with very severe disabilities: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 96(5) Mar 1992, 463-474.
  • Block, M. E. (1992). What is appropriate physical education for students with profound disabilities? : Adapted Physical Activity Quarterly Vol 9(3) Jul 1992, 197-213.
  • Block, M. E., & Zeman, R. (1996). Including students with disabilities in regular physical education: Effects on nondisabled children: Adapted Physical Activity Quarterly Vol 13(1) Jan 1996, 38-49.
  • Bloomberg, K., West, D., & Iacono, T. A. (2003). PICTURE IT: An evaluation of a training program for carers of adults with severe and multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 28(3) Sep 2003, 260-282.
  • Blumina, M. G. (1989). Prevalence, origin and some characteristics of clinical manifestations of complex disorders: Defektologiya No 3 1989, 3-10.
  • Blyden, A. E. (1989). Survival word acquisition in mentally retarded adolescents with multihandicaps: Effects of color-reversed stimulus materials: The Journal of Special Education Vol 22(4) Win 1989, 493-501.
  • Bochner, S. (2007). Review of Enhancing everyday communication for children with disabilities: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 32(3) Sep 2007, 226-227.
  • Bolduc, M., Gresset, J., Sanschagrin, S., & Thibodeau, J. (1993). A model for the efficient interdisciplinary assessment of young visually impaired children: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 87(10) Dec 1993, 410-414.
  • Bond, D. E. (1984). Aspects of additional impairment and multiple handicaps: AEP (Association of Educational Psychologists) Journal Vol 6(5) Win 1984, 50-61.
  • Borgioli, J. A., & Kennedy, C. H. (2003). Transitions Between School and Hospital for Students with Multiple Disabilities: A Survey of Causes, Educational Continuity, and Parental Perceptions: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 28(1) Spr 2003, 1-6.
  • Brady, M. P., Martin, S., Williams, R. E., & Burta, M. (1991). The effects of fifth graders' socially directed behavior on motor and social responses of children with severe multiple handicaps: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 12(1) 1991, 1-16.
  • Branco, A. U., & de Lemos Mettel, T. P. (1995). Cultural canalization of child-child interactions in preschool: Psicologia: Teoria e Pesquisa Vol 11(1) Jan-Apr 1995, 13-22.
  • Brauner, A., & Brauner, F. (1987). Handicapped children discover their own image: Psychologie Medicale Vol 19(9) Sep 1987, 1583-1586.
  • Breen, C., Haring, T., Pitts-Conway, V., & Gaylord-Ross, R. (1985). The training and generalization of social interaction during breaktime at two job sites in the natural environment: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 10(1) Spr 1985, 41-50.
  • Breslau, N. (1983). The psychological study of chronically ill and disabled children: Are healthy siblings appropriate controls? : Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology Vol 11(3) Sep 1983, 379-391.
  • Breslau, N., Weitzman, M., & Messenger, K. (1982). Psychologic functioning of siblings of disabled children: Annual Progress in Child Psychiatry & Child Development 1982, 397-416.
  • Britten, N., Morgan, K., Fenwick, P. B., & Britten, H. (1986). Epilepsy and handicap from birth to age 36: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 28(6) Dec 1986, 719-728.
  • Brock, M. D. (1976). The problem family: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 2(3) May-Jun 1976, 139-143.
  • Brodin, J. (2005). Diversity of aspects on play in children with profound multiple disabilities: Early Child Development and Care Vol 175(7-8) Nov 2005, 635-646.
  • Brown, R. I. (1987). Rehabilitation in Australia: A look at someone else's backyard: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 13(3) Sep 1987, 127-132.
  • Bruns, J. M., Cram, J. T., & Rogers, G. J. (1979). Impedance and otoscopy screening of multiply handicapped children in school: Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools Vol 10(1) Jan 1979, 54-58.
  • Brusca, R. M., Nieminen, G. S., Carter, R., & Repp, A. C. (1989). The relationship of staff contact and activity to the stereotypy of children with multiple disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 14(2) Sum 1989, 127-136.
  • Bryan, T. H., & Wheeler, R. A. (1976). Teachers' behaviors in classes for severely retarded-multiply trainable mentally retarded, learning disabled and normal children: Mental Retardation Vol 14(4) Aug 1976, 41-45.
  • Buchka, M. (1973). Mental handicap: a multiple handicap: Praxis der Kinderpsychologie und Kinderpsychiatrie Vol 22(5) Jul 1973, 171-174.
  • Bullock, A., Dalrymple, G. F., & Danca, J. M. (1975). Communication and the nonverbal, multihandicapped child: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 29(3) Mar 1975, 150-152.
  • Burd, L., Fisher, W., & Kerbeshian, J. (1985). Pervasive developmental disorders in multiply disabled children: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 46(9-10) Sep-Oct 1985, 246-249.
  • Burke, S. O., Costello, E. A., & Handley-Derry, M. H. (1989). Maternal stress and repeated hospitalizations of children who are physically disabled: Children's Health Care Vol 18(2) Spr 1989, 82-90.
  • Burti, L. (1988). Rehabilitation and therapeutic continuity in community efforts: Toward an integration of various approaches to long-term treatment: Psichiatria Generale e dell'Eta Evolutiva Vol 26(Suppl) 1988, 109-114.
  • Busse, D. G., Romer, L. T., Fewell, R. R., & Vadasy, P. F. (1985). Employment of deaf-blind rubella students in a subsidized work program: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(2) Feb 1985, 59-64.
  • Butterworth, G., & MacPherson, F. (1987). Sensorimotor intelligence in profoundly handicapped children and youth: Fruhforderung interdisziplinar Vol 6(2) 1987, 62-72.
  • Calvert, D. R., Reddell, R. C., Jacobs, U., & Baltzer, S. (1972). Experiences with preschool deaf-blind children: Exceptional Children Vol 38(5) Jan 1972, 415-421.
  • Cameron, M. J., Luiselli, J. K., McGrath, M., & Carlton, R. (1992). Stimulus control analysis and treatment of noncompliant behavior: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 1992, 141-150.
  • Campbell, P. H. (1987). The integrated programming team: An approach for coordinating professionals of various disciplines in programs for students with severe and multiple handicaps: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 12(2) Sum 1987, 107-116.
  • Campbell, P. H., McInerney, W. F., & Cooper, M. A. (1984). Therapeutic programming for students with severe handicaps: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 38(9) Sep 1984, 594-602.
  • Campbell, P. H., Milbourne, S., Dugan, L. M., & Wilcox, M. J. (2006). A Review of Evidence on Practices for Teaching Young Children to Use Assistive Technology Devices: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 26(1) Spr 2006, 3-13.
  • Cangelosi, P. A. (1978). Touch, talk, and travel: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 72(7) Sep 1978, 284-286.
  • Carnaby, S. (2007). Developing good practice in the clinical assessment of people with profound intellectual disabilities and multiple impairment: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 88-96.
  • Caro, P., & Snell, M. E. (1989). Characteristics of teaching communication to people with moderate and severe disabilities: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 24(1) Mar 1989, 63-77.
  • Carsrud, A. L., & et al. (1979). Effects of social and environmental change on institutionalized mentally retarded persons: The relocation syndrome reconsidered: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 84(3) Nov 1979, 266-272.
  • Carter, M., & Grunsell, J. (2001). The behavior chain interruption strategy: A review of research and discussion of future directions: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 26(1) Spr 2001, 37-49.
  • Casey, G. A., Hunt, H. M., Paddon, A. C., & Wilcock, P. M. (1983). Paired associates: A workshop model for effecting change: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 9(3) May-Jun 1983, 137-144.
  • Cass, H., Price, K., Reilly, S., Wisbeach, A., & McConachie, H. (1999). A model for the assessment and management of children with multiple disabilities: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 25(3) May 1999, 191-211.
  • Chen, S.-C., Tang, F.-T., Chen, Y.-L., Chen, W.-L., Li, Y.-C., Shih, Y.-Y., et al. (2004). Infrared-based communication augmentation system for people with multiple disabilities: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 26(18) Sep 2004, 1105-1109.
  • Chess, S. (1987). Psychosocial problems and coping strategies of multihandicapped children and their families. Orlando, FL, England: Grune & Stratton, Inc/Harcourt, Bra.
  • Cipolotti, L., Robinson, G., Blair, J., & Frith, U. (1999). Fractionation of visual memory: Evidence from a case with multiple neurodevelopmental impairments: Neuropsychologia Vol 37(4) Apr 1999, 455-465.
  • Cole, A. J. (2002). Evaluation and treatment of epilepsy in multiply handicapped individuals: Epilepsy & Behavior Vol 3(6) Dec 2002, S2-S6.
  • Collins, B. C., Gast, D. L., Wolery, M., Holcombe, A., & et al. (1991). Using constant time delay to teach self-feeding to young students with severe/profound handicaps: Evidence of limited effectiveness: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 3(2) Jun 1991, 157-179.
  • Coninx, F. (1995). Aural rehabilitation issues with multiply handicapped hearing-impaired children: Scandinavian Audiology Supplement Vol 24(Suppl 40) 1995, 61-65.
  • Cook, R. (1974). Sex education program service model for the multihandicapped adult: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 35(9) Sep 1974, 264-267.
  • Copley, J., & Ziviani, J. (2004). Barriers to the use of assistive technology for children with multiple disabilities: Occupational Therapy International Vol 11(4) 2004, 229-243.
  • Copley, J., & Ziviani, J. (2005). Assistive Technology Assessment and Planning for Children with Multiple Disabilities in Educational Settings: British Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 68(12) Dec 2005, 559-566.
  • Cotten, P. D., & Wade, J. P. (1984). A demonstration work activities center for multiply handicapped, visually impaired persons: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 78(7) Sep 1984, 303-306.
  • Crawford, J. D. (1987). Individual psychotherapy with the nonvocal patient: A unique application of communication devices: Rehabilitation Psychology Vol 32(2) Sum 1987, 93-98.
  • Crawford, M. R., & Schuster, J. W. (1993). Using microswitches to teach toy use: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 5(4) Dec 1993, 349-368.
  • Crews, J. E., Frey, W. D., & Peterson, P. E. (1987). Independent living for the handicapped elderly community: A national view: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 81(7) Sep 1987, 305-308.
  • Crowe, T. K., VanLeit, B., & Berghmans, K. K. (2000). Mothers' perceptions of child care assistance: The impact of a child's disability: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 54(1) Jan-Feb 2000, 52-58.
  • Crowe, T. K., VanLeit, B., Berghmans, K. K., & Mann, P. (1997). Role perceptions of mothers with young children: The impact of a child's disability: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 51(8) Sep 1997, 651-661.
  • Curtis, W. S., Donlon, E. T., & Tweedie, D. (1974). Communicative behavior of deaf-blind children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 6(4) Dec 1974, 114-118.
  • Curtis, W. S., Donlon, E. T., & Tweedie, D. (1975). Learning behavior of deaf-blind children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 7(2) May 1975, 40-48.
  • Danella, E. A. (1973). A study of tactile preference in multiply-handicapped children: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 27(8) Nov 1973, 457-463.
  • Dano, C., & Lopez, E. (1971). Investigation of 200 cases of request for placement in specialized residential accommodation drawn from consultations at the Committee for the Study & Care of Severely Retarded (CESAP): Revue de Neuropsychiatrie Infantile et d'Hygiene Mentale de l'Enfance Vol 19(3-4) Mar 1971, 151-158.
  • Dauterman, W. L. (1972). Manual for the Stanford Multi-Modality Imagery Test. New York, NY: American Foundation for the Blind.
  • Davey, B. J., & Lignugaris/Kraft, B. (2005). A practical approach to functional behavioral assessment in a public (state supported) school: Successes and limitations: Emotional & Behavioural Difficulties Vol 10(4) Dec 2005, 255-268.
  • David, A. C., & Donovan, E. H. (1975). Initiating group process with parents of multihandicapped children: Social Work in Health Care Vol 1(2) Win 1975-1976, 177-183.
  • Davis, H., & Rushton, R. (1991). Counselling and supporting parents of children with developmental delay: A research evaluation: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 35(2) Apr 1991, 89-112.
  • Davis, P. K., Young, A., Cherry, H., Dahman, D., & Rehfeldt, R. A. (2004). Increasing the happiness of individuals with profound multiple disabilities: Replication and extension: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 37(4) Win 2004, 531-534.
  • de Geeter, K. I., Poppes, P., & Vlaskamp, C. (2002). Parents as experts: The position of parents of children with profound multiple disabilities: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 28(6) Nov 2002, 443-453.
  • de Moor, J. M. H., Didden, R., Reinders, A. J. M., & Seys, D. M. (2002). Behavioral treatment of a multiply handicapped child who refused food. A single case study: Kindheit und Entwicklung Vol 11(4) 2002, 247-253.
  • Demb, H. B., & Noskin, O. (2001). The use of the term Multiple Complex Developmental Disorder in a diagnostic clinic serving young children with developmental disabilities: A report of 15 cases: Mental Health Aspects of Developmental Disabilities Vol 4(2) Apr-Jun 2001, 4960.
  • Demchak, M. (1989). A comparison of graduated guidance and increasing assistance in teaching adults with severe handicaps leisure skills: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 24(1) Mar 1989, 45-55.
  • Denoisay, M., & Montaclair, B. (1982). The child in relationship with the psychotherapist, the child in relationship with the speech therapist: Pratique des Mots No 38 Mar 1982, 5-8.
  • Descalzo, A., & Masanes, P. (1985). Study of the action of tiapride on self-mutilation behaviors in mentally deficient children: Neuropsychiatrie de l'Enfance et de l'Adolescence Vol 33(4-5) Apr-May 1985, 191-195.
  • Dessibourg, C.-A. (2005). Mental deficiency and polyhandicap: new challenges: Schweizer Archiv fur Neurologie und Psychiatrie Vol 156(2) Feb 2005, 75-79.
  • DeToledo, J. C., Lowe, M. R., & Haddad, H. (2002). Behaviors mimicking seizures in institutionalized individuals with multiple disabilities and epilepsy: A video-EEG study: Epilepsy & Behavior Vol 3(3,Pt1) Jun 2002, 242-244.
  • Dibble, F. B. (1984). Focus on the hands: A beginning approach to teaching typing to visually impaired, multiply handicapped students: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 78(8) Oct 1984, 345-349.
  • Dibenedetto, T. A. (1976). Problems of the deaf-retarded: A review of the literature: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 11(2) Apr 1976, 164-171.
  • DiCarlo, C. F., Reid, D. H., & Stricklin, S. B. (2003). Increasing toy play among toddlers with multiple disabilities in an inclusive classroom: A more-to-less, child-directed intervention continuum: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 24(3) May-Jun 2003, 195-209.
  • Diebold, M. H., Curtis, W. S., & DuBose, R. F. (1978). Developmental scales versus observational measures for deaf-blind children: Exceptional Children Vol 44(4) Jan 1978, 275-278.
  • Dimond, R. E., & Hirt, M. (1974). Investigation of the generalizability of attitudes toward body products as a function of psychopathology and long-term hospitalization: Journal of Clinical Psychology Vol 30(3) Jul 1974, 251-252.
  • Downing, J. (1988). Active versus passive programming: A critique of IEP objectives for students with the most severe disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 13(3) Fal 1988, 197-201.
  • Downing, J., & Bailey, B. (1990). Developing vision use within functional daily activities for students with visual and multiple disabilities: RE:view Vol 21(4) Win 1990, 209-220.
  • Downing, J., & Eichinger, J. (1990). Instructional strategies for learners with dual sensory impairments in integrated settings: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 15(2) Sum 1990, 98-105.
  • Downing, J. E. (2001). Meeting the communication needs of students with severe and multiple disabilities in general education classrooms: Exceptionality Vol 9(3) 2001, 147-156.
  • Downing, J. E., & Siegel-Causey, E. (1988). Enhancing the nonsymbolic communicative behavior of children with multiple impairments: Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools Vol 19(4) Oct 1988, 338-348.
  • Dreger, R. M. (1976). HEED's Need: Follow-up: PsycCRITIQUES Vol 21 (8), Aug, 1976.
  • DuBose, R. F. (1977). Predictive value of infant intelligence scales with multiply handicapped children: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 81(4) Jan 1977, 388-390.
  • Dunlap, G., Kern-Dunlap, L., Clarke, S., & Robbins, F. R. (1991). Functional assessment, curricular revision, and severe behavior problems: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 24(2) Sum 1991, 387-397.
  • Dunnett, J. (1990). A visual assessment of a young multiply handicapped girl and an associated teaching programme: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 16(6) Nov-Dec 1990, 355-363.
  • Dunst, C. J., Cushing, P. J., & Vance, S. D. (1985). Response-contingent learning in profoundly handicapped infants: A social systems perspective: Analysis & Intervention in Developmental Disabilities Vol 5(1-2) 1985, 33-47.
  • Duquenne, V. (1996). Lattice analysis and the representation of handicap associations: Social Networks Vol 18(3) Jul 1996, 217-230.
  • Dura, J. R. (1991). Controlling extremely dangerous aggressive outbursts when functional analysis fails: Psychological Reports Vol 69(2) Oct 1991, 451-459.
  • Dura, J. R., Aman, M. G., & Mulick, J. A. (1988). Medication use in an ICF/MR for nonambulatory severely and profoundly mentally retarded children: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 1(3) Sep 1988, 155-160.
  • Dura, J. R., Mulick, J. A., Hammer, D., & Myers, E. G. (1990). Establishing independent microcomputer use in people with multiple handicaps, profound mental retardation, and a history of learning failure: Computers in Human Behavior Vol 6(2) 1990, 177-183.
  • Durand, V. M., & Kishi, G. (1987). Reducing severe behavior problems among persons with dual sensory impairments: An evaluation of a technical assistance model: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 12(1) Spr 1987, 2-10.
  • Durando, J. (2008). A survey on literacy instruction for students with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 102(1) Jan 2008, 40-45.
  • Durbach, M., & Pence, A. R. (1991). A comparison of language production skills of preschoolers with special needs in segregated and integrated settings: Early Child Development and Care Vol 68 Mar 1991, 49-69.
  • D'Zamko, M. E., & Hampton, I. (1985). Personnel preparation for multihandicapped hearing-impaired students: A review of the literature: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 130(1) Mar 1985, 9-14.
  • Eda, Y., Shinohara, A., & Sakai, T. (2002). SpO-sub-2 as an index to evaluate appropriate mealtime length for a student with severe and multiple disabilities: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 39(6) Mar 2002, 131-141.
  • Edebol-Tysk, K. (1989). Evaluation of care-load for individuals with spastic tetraplegia: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 31(6) Dec 1989, 737-745.
  • Einam, M., & Cuskelly, M. (2002). Paid employment of mothers and fathers of an adult child with multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 46(2) Feb 2002, 158-167.
  • Elder, P. S., & Bergman, J. S. (1978). Visual Symbol Communication Instruction with nonverbal, multiply-handicapped individuals: Mental Retardation Vol 16(2) Apr 1978, 107-112.
  • Elliott, R., Powers, A., & Funderburg, R. (1988). Learning disabled hearing-impaired students: Teacher survey: Volta Review Vol 90(6) Oct-Nov 1988, 277-286.
  • Empey, L. J. (1977). Clinical group work with multi-handicapped adolescents: Social Casework Vol 58(10) Dec 1977, 593-599.
  • Endo, S. i. (1992). An approach aimed at encouraging expression of ideation by severely and multiply handicapped children: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 29(4) Mar 1992, 21-25.
  • Erhardt, R. P. (1987). Visual function in the student with multiple handicaps: An integrative transdisciplinary model for assessment and intervention: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 19(3) Fal 1987, 87-98.
  • Erhardt, R. P., Beatty, P. A., & Hertsgaard, D. M. (1988). A developmental visual assessment for children with multiple handicaps: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 7(4) Win 1988, 84-101.
  • Erin, J. (2006). Children with Multiple and Visual Disabilities. Bethesda, MD: Woodbine House.
  • Erwin, E. J., & Guintini, M. (2000). Inclusion and classroom membership in early childhood: International Journal of Disability, Development and Education Vol 47(3) Sep 2000, 237-257.
  • Fabry, P. L., & Reid, D. H. (1978). Teaching foster grandparents to train severely handicapped persons: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 11(1) Spr 1978, 111-123.
  • Facon, B. (1996). The use of switches to promote leisure in multiply handicapped persons: A possible and necessary priority: Revue Francophone de la Deficience Intellectuelle Vol 7(2) Dec 1996, 101-112.
  • Facon, B., & Darge, T. M. (1996). Evaluation of toy variation on engagement in a leisure activity of two children with profound multiple handicaps: Psychological Reports Vol 79(1) Aug 1996, 203-210.
  • Factor, D. C. (1987). Social skills training with multihandicapped youth: An introduction: Journal of Child Care Vol 3(1) 1987, 9-14.
  • Fagan, S., Gray, K., & Factor, D. C. (1987). Foxx's "Stack the Deck": Teaching social skills to mentally handicapped adolescents: Journal of Child Care Vol 3(1) 1987, 29-34.
  • Farley, R. C., Means, B. L., Akridge, R. L., & Rice, B. D. (1986). Psychoeducational training with high-risk rehabilitation clients in a field office setting: A pilot study: Journal of Applied Rehabilitation Counseling Vol 17(2) Sum 1986, 25-28.
  • Favel, P. (1982). Coeducation in an institution for epileptic adults: Genitif Vol 4(8) 1982, 22-29.
  • Fehr, A., & Beckwith, B. E. (1989). Water misting: Treating self-injurious behavior in a multiply handicapped, visually impaired child: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 83(5) May 1989, 245-248.
  • Fenn, G., & Rowe, J. A. (1975). An experiment in manual communication: British Journal of Disorders of Communication Vol 10(1) Apr 1975, 3-16.
  • Ferguson, D. L., & Ferguson, P. M. (1986). The new victors: A progressive policy analysis of work reform for people with very severe handicaps: Mental Retardation Vol 24(6) Dec 1986, 331-338.
  • Ferri, B. A. (2005). Review of Women With Visible and Invisible Disabilities: Multiple Intersections, Multiple Issues, Multiple Therapies: Mental Retardation Vol 43(5) Oct 2005, 376-377.
  • Fewell, R. R., & Rich, J. S. (1987). Play assessment as a procedure for examining cognitive, communication, and social skills in multihandicapped children: Journal of Psychoeducational Assessment Vol 5(2) Jun 1987, 107-118.
  • Fink, W. T., & Sandall, S. R. (1980). A comparison of one-to-one and small group instructional strategies with developmentally disabled preschoolers: Mental Retardation Vol 18(1) Feb 1980, 34-35.
  • Finkle, L. J., Hanson, D. P., & Hostetler, S. K. (1983). The assessment of profoundly handicapped children: School Psychology Review Vol 12(1) Win 1983, 75-81.
  • Fisher, D. (2005). Review of Educating Children With Multiple Disabilities: A Collaborative Approach (4th ed.): Mental Retardation Vol 43(1) Feb 2005, 66-67.
  • Fisher, W., Burd, L., & Kerbeshian, J. (1985). Integrating developmental, pharmacologic, and psychological diagnoses and management through the transdisciplinary team process: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 46(9-10) Sep-Oct 1985, 268-271.
  • Fisher, W., Burd, L., Kuna, D. P., & Berg, D. J. (1985). Attention deficit disorders and the hyperactivities in multiply disabled children: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 46(9-10) Sep-Oct 1985, 250-254.
  • Fitz-Gerald, D., & Fitz-Gerald, M. (1979). Sexual implications of deaf-blindness: Sexuality and Disability Vol 2(3) Fal 1979, 212-215.
  • Fjermedal, O., & Laukli, E. (1989). Paediatric auditory brainstem response and pure-tone audiometry: Threshold comparisons: A study of 142 difficult-to-test children: Scandinavian Audiology Vol 18(2) 1989, 105-111.
  • Flexer, C., & Gans, D. P. (1985). Comparative evaluation of the auditory responsiveness of normal infants and profoundly multihandicapped children: Journal of Speech & Hearing Research Vol 28(2) Jun 1985, 163-168.
  • Flexer, C., & Gans, D. P. (1986). Distribution of auditory response behaviors in normal infants and profoundly multihandicapped children: Journal of Speech & Hearing Research Vol 29(3) Sep 1986, 425-429.
  • Flynn, R. J., & Salomone, P. R. (1977). Performance of the MMPI in predicting rehabilitation outcome: A discriminant analysis, double cross-validation assessment: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 38(1) Jan 1977, 12-15.
  • Foreman, P., Arthur-Kelly, M., Pascoe, S., & King, B. S. (2004). Evaluating the Educational Experiences of Students With Profound and Multiple Disabilities in Inclusive and Segregated Classroom Settings: An Australian Perspective: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 29(3) Fal 2004, 183-193.
  • French, L. (1992). Work acclimation of multihandicapped sensory impaired in the school production workshop: Vocational Evaluation & Work Adjustment Bulletin Vol 25(3) Fal 1992, 77-78.
  • Frenette, L., & Normand-Guerette, D. (1992). Training needs of teachers working with profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped children: Revue Francophone de la Deficience Intellectuelle Vol 3(2) Dec 1992, 133-144.
  • Friedlander, B. Z., Silva, D. A., & Knight, M. S. (1973). Selective responses to auditory and auditory-vibratory stimuli by severely retarded deaf-blind children: Journal of Auditory Research Vol 13(2) Apr 1973, 105-111.
  • Fujimoto, B. (1974). Concerning an educational system that assures the development of severely handicapped children: Japanese Journal of Child Psychiatry Vol 15(2) Mar-Apr 1974, 96-102.
  • Furman, L. M. (1989). Institutionalized disabled adolescents: Gynecologic care: The pediatrician's role: Clinical Pediatrics Vol 28(4) Apr 1989, 163-170.
  • Gable, R. A., Hendrickson, J. M., & Young, C. C. (1984). Teacher behavior in classes for the mentally retarded and multiply handicapped: A comparative analysis: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 19(1) Feb 1984, 54-63.
  • Gallagher, P. A., & Heim, R. E. (1974). The classroom application of behavior modification principles for multiple handicapped blind students: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 68(10) Dec 1974, 447-453.
  • Gallagher, R. J., Jens, K. G., & O'Donnell, K. J. (1983). The effect of physical status on the affective expression of handicapped infants: Infant Behavior & Development Vol 6(1) Jan 1983, 73-77.
  • Gans, D. P., & Flexer, C. (1983). Auditory response behavior of severely and profoundly multiply handicapped children: Journal of Auditory Research Vol 23(2) Apr 1983, 137-148.
  • Gardner, J. M., & Breuer, A. (1985). Using microcomputers in the evaluation, training, and management of persons with developmental disabilities: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 11(3) Sep 1985, 129-134.
  • Gardner, L., Morse, A. R., Tulloch, D., & Trief, E. (1986). Visual impairment among children from birth to age five: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 80(1) Jan 1986, 535-537.
  • Garner, D., Becker, H., Schur, S., & Hammer, E. (1991). An innovative program for multihandicapped deaf students using the FSSI: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 136(3) Jul 1991, 265-269.
  • Gast, D. L., Jacobs, H. A., Logan, K. R., Murray, A. S., Holloway, A., & Long, L. (2000). Pre-session assessment of preferences for students with profound multiple disabilities: Education & Training in Mental Retardation & Developmental Disabilities Vol 35(4) Dec 2000, 393-405.
  • Gates, C. F. (1985). Survey of multiply handicapped visually impaired children in the Rocky Mountain/Great Plains region: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(9) Nov 1985, 385-391.
  • Gates, C. F., & Kappan, D. I. (1985). Teacher preparation in the education of visually impaired children: A multi-competency approach: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(7) Sep 1985, 306-307.
  • Gayda, M., & Saleh, D. (2002). Central and peripheral deafness for autistic and deaf children: Annales Medico-Psychologiques Vol 160(9) Nov 2002, 671-676.
  • Gee, K., Graham, N., Goetz, L., Oshima, G., & et al. (1991). Teaching students to request the continuation of routine activities by using time delay and decreasing physical assistance in the context of chain interruption: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 16(3) Fal 1991, 154-167.
  • Gee, K., Graham, N., Sailor, W., & Goetz, L. (1995). Use of integrated, general education, and community settings as primary contexts for skill instruction for students with severe, multiple disabilities: Behavior Modification Vol 19(1) Jan 1995, 33-58.
  • Geekie, K. M., & Brown, H. P. (1995). Treating substance abuse in the multidisabled: An overview: Alcoholism Treatment Quarterly Vol 12(3) 1995, 87-95.
  • Geiger, W. L., Bradley, R. H., Rock, S. L., & Croce, R. (1986). "Delivery of therapeutic services in special education programs for learners with severe handicaps": Commentary: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 6(2) Sum 1986, 16-21.
  • Gellhaus, M. M., & Olson, M. R. (1993). Using color and contrast to modify the educational environment of visually impaired students with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 87(1) Jan 1993, 19-20.
  • Geruschat, D. R. (1992). Using the Acuity Card Procedure to assess visual acuity in children with severe and multiple impairments: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 86(1) Jan 1992, 25-27.
  • Gevelinger, M., Ottenbacher, K. J., & Tiffany, T. (1988). The reliability of the Motor Development Checklist: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 42(2) Feb 1988, 81-86.
  • Giangreco, M. F. (1986). Delivery of therapeutic services in special education programs for learners with severe handicaps: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 6(2) Sum 1986, 3570.
  • Giangreco, M. F. (1986). "Delivery of therapeutic services in special education programs for learners with severe handicaps": Reply: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 6(2) Sum 1986, 22-25.
  • Giangreco, M. F. (1986). Effects of integrated therapy: A pilot study: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 11(3) Fal 1986, 205-208.
  • Giangreco, M. F. (1987). A Curriculum for Profoundly Handicapped Students: A critique: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 7(3) Fal 1987, 75-83.
  • Giangreco, M. F., Cloninger, C. J., Dennis, R. E., & Edelman, S. W. (1993). National expert validation of COACH: Congruence with exemplary practice and suggestions for improvement: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 18(2) Sum 1993, 109-120.
  • Giangreco, M. F., Cloninger, C. J., Mueller, P. H., Yuan, S., & et al. (1991). Perspectives of parents whose children have dual sensory impairments: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 16(1) Spr 1991, 14-24.
  • Giangreco, M. F., Dennis, R. E., Edelman, S. W., & Cloninger, C. J. (1994). Dressing your IEPs for the general education climate: Analysis of IEP goals and objectives for students with multiple disabilities: Remedial and Special Education Vol 15(5) Sep 1994, 288-296.
  • Gibson, D., & Rogers, T. B. (1986). Stability of performance profiles for the developmentally handicapped in open job and community placement: Mental Retardation & Learning Disability Bulletin Vol 14(1) 1986, 35-43.
  • Gleason, J. J. (1993). The creation of meaning: What persons with severe or profound multiple developmental disabilities do in context: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 18(3) 1993, 157-167.
  • Glenn, S. M. (1983). The application of an automated system for the assessment of profoundly mentally handicapped children: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 6(3) Sep 1983, 358-360.
  • Glenn, S. M., & Cunningham, C. C. (1984). Nursery rhymes and early language acquisition by mentally handicapped children: Exceptional Children Vol 51(1) Sep 1984, 72-74.
  • Glenn, S. M., & Cunningham, C. C. (1984). Selective auditory preferences and the use of automated equipment by severely, profoundly and multiply handicapped children: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 28(4) Dec 1984, 281-296.
  • Gleser, J. M., Margulies, J. Y., Nyska, M., Porat, S., & et al. (1992). Physical and psychosocial benefits of modified Judo practice for blind, mentally retarded children: A pilot study: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 74(3, Pt 1) Jun 1992, 915-925.
  • Glick, P. S., Guyer, B., Burr, B. H., & Gorbach, I. E. (1983). Pediatric nursing homes: Implications of the Massachusetts experience for residential care of multiply handicapped children: New England Journal of Medicine Vol 309(11) Sep 1983, 640-646.
  • Gnadt, G. R., & Wesson, M. D. (1992). A survey of the vision assessment of the developmentally disabled and multi-handicapped in University Affiliated Programs (UAPs): Journal of the American Optometric Association Vol 63(9) Sep 1992, 619-625.
  • Goldblatt, M., & Steisel, I. M. (1973). Behavior modification with multi-handicapped blind children: Proceedings of the Annual Convention of the American Psychological Association 1973, 809-810.
  • Goldfine, P. E., Sapakoff, G. A., Berman, H. J., & Smith, R. M. (1984). A treatment model for multi-handicapped children with severe psychiatric illness and deafness: Journal of Child & Adolescent Psychotherapy Vol 1(2) Sep 1984, 111-114.
  • Goode, D. A. (1984). Presentation practices of a family with a deaf-blind, retarded daughter: Family Relations Vol 33(1) Jan 1984, 173-185.
  • Goode, D. A., & Gaddy, M. R. (1976). Ascertaining choice with alingual, deaf-blind and retarded clients: Mental Retardation Vol 14(6) Dec 1976, 10-12.
  • Gralewicz, A. (1973). Play deprivation in multihandicapped children: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 27(2) Mar 1973, 70-72.
  • Granlund, M., Olsson, C., von Dardel, T., & Andersson, M. (1990). Parents, group-home staff and school staff working together around children with profound multiple disabilities: British Journal of Mental Subnormality Vol 36(70, Pt 1) Jan 1990, 37-52.
  • Granlund, M., Steensson, A.-L., Sundin, M., & Olsson, C. (1992). Inservice training in collaborative problem solving and goal setting for special education teacher consultants working with profoundly impaired persons: British Journal of Mental Subnormality Vol 38(2)[75] Jul 1992, 94-113.
  • Granlund, M., & Wilder, J. (2006). Studying interaction between children who do not use symbols in interaction and their parents within the family system -- methodological challenges: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 28(3) Feb 2006, 175-182.
  • Green, C. W., Canipe, V. S., Way, P. J., & Reid, D. H. (1986). Improving the functional utility and effectiveness of classroom services for students with profound multiple handicaps: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 11(3) Fal 1986, 162-170.
  • Green, C. W., Middleton, S. G., & Reid, D. H. (2000). Embedded evaluation of preferences sampled from person-centered plans for people with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 33(4) Win 2000, 639-642.
  • Green, C. W., & Reid, D. H. (1999). A behavioral approach to identifying sources of happiness and unhappiness among individuals with profound multiple disabilities: Behavior Modification Vol 23(2) Apr 1999, 280-293.
  • Green, C. W., & Reid, D. H. (1999). Reducing indices of unhappiness among individuals with profound multiple disabilities during therapeutic exercise routines: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 32(2) Sum 1999, 137-147.
  • Green, C. W., Reid, D. H., Canipe, V. S., & Gardner, S. M. (1991). A comprehensive evaluation of reinforcer identification processes for persons with profound multiple handicaps: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 24(3) Fal 1991, 537-552.
  • Green, C. W., Reid, D. H., Rollyson, J. H., & Passante, S. C. (2005). An Enriched Teaching Program for Reducing Resistance and Indices of Unhappiness Among Individuals With Profound Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 38(2) Sum 2005, 221-233.
  • Greene, B. F., Willis, B. S., Levy, R., & Bailey, J. S. (1978). Measuring client gains from staff-implemented programs: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 11(3) Fal 1978, 395-412.
  • Greenwald, M. A. (1978). The effectiveness of distorted music versus interrupted music to decrease self-stimulatory behaviors in profoundly retarded adolescents: Journal of Music Therapy Vol 15(2) Sum 1978, 58-66.
  • Griffin, J. C., Ricketts, R. W., Williams, D. E., Locke, B. J., & et al. (1987). A community survey of self-injurious behavior among developmentally disabled children and adolescents: Hospital & Community Psychiatry Vol 38(9) Sep 1987, 959-963.
  • Griggs, C. A., Jones, P. M., & Lee, R. E. (1989). Videofluoroscopic investigation of feeding disorders of children with multiple handicap: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 31(3) Jun 1989, 303-308.
  • Grisham-Brown, J., Schuster, J. W., Hemmeter, M. L., & Collins, B. C. (2000). Using an embedding strategy to teach preschoolers with significant disabilities: Journal of Behavioral Education Vol 10(2-3) Sep 2000, 139-162.
  • Grove, N. (2007). Exploring the absence of high points in story reminiscence with carers of people with profound disabilities: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(4) Dec 2007, 252-260.
  • Guess, D., Mulligan-Ault, M., Roberts, S., Struth, J., & et al. (1988). Implications of biobehavioral states for the education and treatment of students with the most profoundly handicapping conditions: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 13(3) Fal 1988, 163-174.
  • Guess, D., Roberts, S., & Rues, J. (2002). Longitudinal analysis of state patterns and related variables among infants and children with significant disabilities: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 27(2) Sum 2002, 112-124.
  • Guess, D., Roberts, S., Siegel-Causey, E., Ault, M. M., & et al. (1993). Analysis of behavior state conditions and associated environmental variables among students with profound handicaps: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 97(6) May 1993, 634-653.
  • Guess, D., Roberts, S., Siegel-Causey, E., & Rues, J. (1995). Replication and extended analysis of behavior state, environmental events, and related variables among individuals with profound disabilities: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 100(1) Jul 1995, 36-50.
  • Guess, D., & Siegel-Causey, D. (1995). Attractor dimensions of behavior state changes among individuals with profound disabilities: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 99(6) May 1995, 642-663.
  • Guess, D., Siegel-Causey, E., Roberts, S., Guy, B., & et al. (1993). Analysis of state organizational patterns among students with profound disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 18(2) Sum 1993, 93-108.
  • Guess, D., Siegel-Causey, E., Roberts, S., Rues, J., & et al. (1990). Assessment and analysis of behavior state and related variables among students with profoundly handicapping conditions: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 15(4) Win 1990, 211-230.
  • Guldager, L. (1972). Using video tape in the education of deaf-blind children: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 66(6) Jun 1972, 178-182.
  • Guldager, L., Hamill, M., & McGlamery, R. D. (1983). Group homes for severely multiply handicapped persons with visual problems: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 77(1) Jan 1983, 4-8.
  • Gutierrez-Griep, R. (1984). Student preference of sensory reinforcers: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 19(2) Apr 1984, 108-113.
  • Guy, B. A. (1992). A Little Knowledge: PsycCRITIQUES Vol 37 (6), Jun, 1992.
  • Haelewyck, M.-C., & Bazier, G. (2002). Research and mental retardation in the Belgium and Luxembourg delegation of the AIRHM: Revue Francophone de la Deficience Intellectuelle Vol 13(2) Dec 2002, 167-187.
  • Hagberg, B., Edebol-Tysk, K., & Edstrom, B. (1988). The basic care needs of profoundly mentally retarded children with multiple handicaps: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 30(3) Jun 1988, 287-293.
  • Hagen, J. (2007). And yet it is possible! - Mentally handicapped persons as subjects of qualitative research: Vierteljahresschrift fur Heilpadagogik und ihre Nachbargebiete Vol 76(1) 2007, 22-34.
  • Hagiliassis, N., Gulbenkoglu, H., Di Marco, M., Young, S., & Hudson, A. (2005). The Anger Management Project: A group intervention for anger in people with physical and multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 30(2) Jun 2005, 86-96.
  • Hall, A., & Bailey, I. L. (1989). A model for training vision functioning: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 83(8) Oct 1989, 390-396.
  • Hall, A., Orel-Bixler, D., & Haegerstrom-Portnoy, G. (1991). Special visual assessment techniques for multiply handicapped persons: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 85(1) Jan 1991, 23-29.
  • Hamilton, T. (1979). Sexuality in deaf blind persons: Sexuality and Disability Vol 2(3) Fal 1979, 238-246.
  • Hammer, E. K. (1975). What is effective programming for deaf-blind children? : New Outlook for the Blind Vol 69(1) Jan 1975, 25-31.
  • Hamre-Nietupski, S., Ayres, B., Nietupski, J., Savage, M., & et al. (1989). Enhancing integration of students with severe disabilities through curricular infusion: A general/special educator partnership: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 24(1) Mar 1989, 78-88.
  • Hanline, M. F. (1993). Inclusion of preschoolers with profound disabilities: An analysis of children's interactions: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 18(1) Spr 1993, 28-35.
  • Hanline, M. F., & Hanson, M. J. (1989). Integration considerations for infants and toddlers with multiple disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 14(3) Fal 1989, 178-183.
  • Hanson, M. J., & Hanline, M. F. (1985). An analysis of response-contingent learning experiences for young children: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 10(1) Spr 1985, 31-40.
  • Hardman, M. L., & Drew, C. J. (1977). The physically handicapped retarded individual: A review: Mental Retardation Vol 15(5) Oct 1977, 43-48.
  • Hardy, N., & Sturmey, P. (1994). Portage guide to early education: III. A rapid training and feedback system to teach and maintain mothers' teaching skills: Educational Psychology Vol 14(3) 1994, 345-358.
  • Harley, R. K., Long, R. G., Merbler, J. B., & Wood, T. A. (1987). Orientation and mobility for the blind multiply handicapped young child: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 81(8) Oct 1987, 377-381.
  • Harley, R. K., Merbler, J. B., & Wood, T. A. (1975). The development of a scale orientation and mobility for multiply impaired blind children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 7(1) Mar 1975, 1-5.
  • Harley, R. K., Wood, T. A., & Merbler, J. B. (1975). Programmed instruction in orientation and mobility for multiply impaired blind children: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 69(9) Nov 1975, 418-423.
  • Harper, D. C. (1984). Child behavior toward the parent: A factor analysis of mothers' reports of disabled children: Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders Vol 14(2) Jun 1984, 165-182.
  • Haupt, U., & Frohlich, A. (1983). Advancement of very severely handicapped children: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 6(4) Dec 1983, 492-494.
  • Haussler, M., Bartels, H., & Strassburg, H.-M. (1996). Multihandicapped blind and partially sighted children in South Germany: II. Aetiology & pathogenesis: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 38(12) Dec 1996, 1076-1090.
  • Haussler, M., Schafer, W.-D., & Neugebauer, H. (1996). Multihandicapped blind & partially sighted children in South Germany: I. Prevalence, impairments & ophthalmological findings: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 38(12) Dec 1996, 1068-1075.
  • Hawke, W. A., & Auerbach, A. (1975). Multi-discipline experience: A fresh approach to aid the multi-handicapped child: Journal of Rehabilitation Vol 41(1) Jan-Feb 1975, 22-24.
  • Hayashi, E. (2006). Daytime drowsiness and response to human stimuli in a child with severe intellectual and physical disabilities: Observation on eye-blink and daytime napping: Sleep and Biological Rhythms Vol 4(1) Feb 2006, 81-83.
  • Hegarty, J. R., & Last, A. (1997). Relaxation training for people who have severe/profound and multiple learning disabilities: British Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 43(85, Pt 2) Jul 1997, 122-139.
  • Hespos, M. A. (1977). Social consequences of being labeled mentally retarded: Vierteljahresschrift fur Heilpadagogik und ihre Nachbargebiete Vol 46(1) Mar 1977, 56-61.
  • Hetherington, R. W., Suttill, J., Holmlund, C., & Frey, D. D. (1979). Evaluation of a regional resource center for multiply handicapped retarded children: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 83(4) Jan 1979, 367-379.
  • Heuer, S. (1989). Leila: II: Pratique des Mots No 67 Jun 1989, 19-24.
  • Hewitt, H. (1978). An educational schema for children with the dual disability of deafness and blindness: Australian Journal of Mental Retardation Vol 5(3) Sep 1978, 81-85.
  • Hewson, S., McConkey, R., & Jeffree, D. (1980). The relationship between structured and free play in the development of a mentally handicapped child: A case study: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 6(2) Mar-Apr 1980, 73-82.
  • Hiemstra, S. J., Vlaskamp, C., & Wiersma, L. A. (2007). Individual focus in an activity centre: An observational study among persons with profound and multiple disabilities: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 42(1) Mar 2007, 14-23.
  • Hill, S. D., & Tomlin, C. (1981). Self-recognition in retarded children: Child Development Vol 52(1) Mar 1981, 145-150.
  • Hinderscheit, L. R., & Reichle, J. (1987). Teaching direct select color encoding to an adolescent with multiple handicaps: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 3(3) Sep 1987, 137-142.
  • Hinrichs, C. A. (1992). Vision rehabilitation for the multiply challenged child: Journal of Optometric Vision Development Vol 23(2) Jun 1992, 9-13.
  • Ho, K. M., & Keiley, M. K. (2003). Dealing with denial: A systems approach for family professionals working with parents of individuals with multiple disabilities: The Family Journal Vol 11(3) Jul 2003, 239-247.
  • Hobbis, V., & Williams, T. (1986). Uses of mechanical vibration in the education of multiply handicaped blind children: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 80(10) Dec 1986, 1003-1004.
  • Hoffmann, M., Weithmann, G., & Rothenbacher, H. (2001). Psychometric analyses of Rivermead Behavioural Memory Test data from chronic multiple handicapped alcoholics: Zeitschrift fur Neuropsychologie Vol 12(3) Aug 2001, 201-206.
  • Hogg, J. (1982). Reduction of self-induced vomiting in a multiply handicapped girl by "lemon juice therapy" and concomitant changes in social behaviour: British Journal of Clinical Psychology Vol 21(3) Sep 1982, 227-228.
  • Hogg, J. (1983). Sensory and social reinforcement of head-turning in a profoundly retarded multiply handicapped child: British Journal of Clinical Psychology Vol 22(1) Feb 1983, 33-40.
  • Hogg, J. (2007). Complex needs and complex solutions: The challenge of profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 79-82.
  • Hogg, J., Juhlberg, K., & Lambe, L. (2007). Policy, service pathways and mortality: A 10-year longitudinal study of people with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 51(5) May 2007, 366-376.
  • Hogg, J., Reeves, D., Roberts, J., & Mudford, O. C. (2001). Consistency, context and confidence in judgements of affective communication in adults with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 45(1) Feb 2001, 18-29.
  • Holburn, S., Nguyen, D., & Vietze, P. (2004). Computer-Assisted Learning for Adults with Profound Multiple Disabilities: Behavioral Interventions Vol 19(1) Feb 2004, 25-37.
  • Holden, J., Jacobson, S., & Wagner, M. (1987). Dustin, the youngest resident: Geriatric Nursing Vol 8(1) Jan-Feb 1987, 22-25.
  • Hollins, S. (1988). Discussion on Paper by Gerhard Rudnitzki: Group Analysis Vol 21(2) Jun 1988, 178-180.
  • Holmes, C. S. (1982). Self-monitoring reactivity and a severe feeding problem: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 11(1) Spr 1982, 66-71.
  • Hong, C. S. (1984). A close look at the contact between our regular clients and staff in small and large play sessions: British Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 47(4) Apr 1984, 121-122.
  • Hood, E.-J. L., Test, D. W., Spooner, F., & Steele, R. (1996). Paid co-worker support for individuals with severe and multiple disabilities: Education & Training in Mental Retardation & Developmental Disabilities Vol 31(3) Sep 1996, 251-265.
  • Hooper, J., Connell, T. M., & Flett, P. J. (1987). Blissymbols and manual signs: A multimodal approach to intervention in a case of multiple disability: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 3(2) Jun 1987, 68-76.
  • Hopper, C., York, R., Simmons, P., & Reske, S. (1976). Reduction of the hand-mouthing behavior of a profoundly retarded, multiply-handicapped student: Child Study Journal Vol 6(3) 1976, 113-126.
  • Horn, E., Jones, H. A., & Hamlett, C. (1991). An investigation of the feasibility of a video game system for developing scanning and selection skills: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 16(2) Sum 1991, 108-115.
  • Horsfall, D., & Maggs, A. (1986). Cooking skills instruction with severely multiply handicapped adolescents: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 12(3) Sep 1986, 177-186.
  • Houtgast, T., & Kramer, S. E. (2007). On the inclusion of cognitive aspects within the European project HearCom: Journal of the American Academy of Audiology Vol 18(7) Jul-Aug 2007, 632-633.
  • Huber, B., Hauser, I., Horstmann, V., Jokeit, G., Liem, S., May, T., et al. (2007). Long-term course of epilepsy in a large cohort of intellectually disabled patients: Seizure Vol 16(1) Jan 2007, 35-42.
  • Hughes, C., Rung, L. L., Wehmeyer, M. L., Agran, M., Copeland, S. R., & Hwang, B. (2000). Self-prompted communication book use to increase social interaction among high school students: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(3) Fal 2000, 153-166.
  • Hughes, C., Rung, L. L., Wehmeyer, M. L., Agran, M., Copeland, S. R., & Hwang, B. (2000). "Self-prompted communication book use to increase social interaction among high school students": Erratum: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(4) Win 2000, 259.
  • Hughes, M. W., Schuster, J. W., & Nelson, C. M. (1993). The acquisition of independent dressing skills by students with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 5(3) Sep 1993, 233-252.
  • Hulme, J. B., & et al. (1983). Perceived behavioral changes in multihandicapped individuals using adapted equipment: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 3(3) Fal 1983, 63-73.
  • Hulme, J. B., Shaver, J., Acher, S., Mullette, L., & et al. (1987). Effects of adaptive seating devices on the eating and drinking of children with multiple handicaps: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 41(2) Feb 1987, 81-89.
  • Hundert, J. (1982). Training teachers in generalized writing of behavior modification programs for multihandicapped deaf children: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 15(1) Spr 1982, 111-122.
  • Hunt, P., Alwell, M., Farron-Davis, F., & Goetz, L. (1996). Creating socially supportive environments for fully included students who experience multiple disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 21(2) Sum 1996, 53-71.
  • Hunt, P., & Goetz, L. (1988). Teaching spontaneous communication in natural settings through interrupted behavior chains: Topics in Language Disorders Vol 9(1) Dec 1988, 58-71.
  • Hunt, P., Staub, D., Alwell, M., & Goetz, L. (1994). Achievement by all students within the context of cooperative learning groups: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 19(4) Win 1994, 290-301.
  • Hurlbut, B. I., Iwata, B. A., & Green, J. D. (1982). Nonvocal language acquisition in adolescents with severe physical disabilities: Blissymbol versus iconic stimulus formats: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 15(2) Sum 1982, 241-258.
  • Hutton, W. O., Talkington, L. W., & Altman, R. (1973). Concomitants of multiple sensory defect: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 37(3) Dec 1973, 740-742.
  • Irvin, L. K., & Lundervold, D. A. (1988). Social validation of decelerative (punishment) procedures by special educators of severely handicapped students: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 9(4) 1988, 331-350.
  • Ismail, H. (1976). Considerations in the provision of comprehensive care for children with severe visual handicap: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 2(2) Mar-Apr 1976, 99-106.
  • Izen, C. L., & Brown, F. (1991). Education and treatment needs of students with profound, multiply handicapping, and medically fragile conditions: A survey of teachers' perceptions: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 16(2) Sum 1991, 94-103.
  • Jackson, A. J., Morrison, E., O'Donoghue, E., Wilson, H., & et al. (1991). The provision of ophthalmic services for a rehabilitation day care centre population with multiple physical handicaps: Ophthalmic and Physiological Optics Vol 11(4) Oct 1991, 314-319.
  • Jackson, L., Ryndak, D. L., & Billingsley, F. (2000). Useful practices in inclusive education: A preliminary view of what experts in moderate to severe disabilities are saying: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(3) Fal 2000, 129-141.
  • Jacobson, J. W., & Janicki, M. P. (1983). Observed prevalence of multiple developmental disabilities: Mental Retardation Vol 21(3) Jun 1983, 87-94.
  • Jan, J. E., & Freeman, R. D. (2004). Melatonin therapy for circadian rhythm sleep disorders in children with multiple disabilities: What have we learned in the last decade? : Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 46(11) Nov 2004, 776-782.
  • Jan, J. E., Good, W. V., Freeman, R. D., & Espezel, H. (1994). Eye-poking: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 36(4) Apr 1994, 321-325.
  • Jansson, L. M., Diamond, O., & Demb, H. B. (1992). Encopresis in a multihandicapped child: Rapid multidisciplinary treatment: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(1) Mar 1992, 83-90.
  • Janz, F. (2007). "It does work somehow...!"--Concept and design of inter-professional cooperation in classroom teams working with pupils with severe and multiple disabilities: Vierteljahresschrift fur Heilpadagogik und ihre Nachbargebiete Vol 76(4) 2007, 302-314.
  • Jarman, P. H., Iwata, B. A., & Lorentzson, A. M. (1983). Development of morning self-care routines in multiply handicapped persons: Applied Research in Mental Retardation Vol 4(2) 1983, 113-122.
  • Jensema, C. J. (1975). A note on the achievement test scores of multiply handicapped hearing impaired children: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 120(1) Feb 1975, 37-39.
  • Johnson, C. M. (1977). Errorless learning in a multihandicapped adolescent: Education & Treatment of Children Vol 1(1) Fal 1977, 25-33.
  • Johnson, C. R., & Babbitt, R. L. (1993). Antecedent manipulation in the treatment of primary solid food refusal: Behavior Modification Vol 17(4) Oct 1993, 510-521.
  • Jones, T. W. (1984). A framework of identification, classification, and placement of multihandicapped hearing-impaired students: Volta Review Vol 86(3) Apr 1984, 142-151.
  • Jones, T. W., & Dunne, M. T. (1988). The CHARGE association: Implications for teachers: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 133(1) Mar 1988, 36-39.
  • Jung, B., & Miller, B. E. (1998). Fieldwork education in a community agency serving residents with multiple disabilities: Opportunities and challenges: Journal on Developmental Disabilities Vol 6(1) Aug 1998, 60-72.
  • Kanthor, H. (1982). Can the practicing pediatrician provide comprehensive health care for the multiply handicapped child? : Clinical Pediatrics Vol 21(5) May 1982, 311-312.
  • Kardos, M. T. (1985). Retardation in the organization of reasoning in children with cerebral palsy with several handicaps and attempt of care and treatment: Neuropsychiatrie de l'Enfance et de l'Adolescence Vol 33(1) Jan 1985, 13-20.
  • Karp, A. (1985). Hearing loss associated with retinitis pigmentosa: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(9) Nov 1985, 404-405.
  • Katsiyannis, A. (1992). Timothy W.: The zero reject principle revisited: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(1) Mar 1992, 91-95.
  • Kelley, P., & Wedding, J. A. (1995). Medications used by students with visual and multiple impairments: Implications for teachers: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 89(1) Jan-Feb 1995, 38-45.
  • Kennedy, C. H., & Haring, T. G. (1993). Teaching choice making during social interactions to students with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 26(1) Spr 1993, 63-76.
  • Kerbeshian, J., & et al. (1985). Gilles de la Tourette disease in multiply disabled children: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 46(9-10) Sep-Oct 1985, 255-258.
  • Kershman, S. M., & Napier, D. (1982). Systematic procedures for eliciting and recording responses to sound stimuli in deaf-blind multihandicapped children: Volta Review Vol 84(4) May 1982, 226-237.
  • Ketchum, B. (1977). The day care alternative: Facilitating normalization of preschool multi-handicapped children: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 6(3) Win 1977, 45-47.
  • Khan, N. A., & Battle, C. U. (1987). Chronic illness: Implications for development and education: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 6(4) Win 1987, 25-32.
  • Kiernan, C. (1977). Toward a curriculum for the profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped child: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 3(4) Jul-Aug 1977, 229-239.
  • Kiernan, D. W., & DuBose, R. F. (1974). Assessing the cognitive development of pre-school deaf-blind children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 6(4) Dec 1974, 103-105.
  • Kir-Stimon, W. (1978). Psychodynamics in rehabilitation of the physically disabled: Rehabilitation Psychology Vol 25(4) 1978, 187-194.
  • Klein, B., Van Hasselt, V. B., Trefelner, M., Sandstrom, D. J., & et al. (1988). The Parent and Toddler Training Project for visually impaired and blind multihandicapped children: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 82(2) Feb 1988, 59-64.
  • Klein, C. (1977). Coping patterns of parents of deaf-blind children: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 122(3) Jun 1977, 310-312.
  • Klewe, L. (1993). An empirical evaluation of spelling boards as a means of communication for the multihandicapped: Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders Vol 23(3) Sep 1993, 559-566.
  • Klineman, J. (1975). Hidden abilities discovered among multiply handicapped blind children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 7(3) Oct 1975, 90-96.
  • Knight, M. S., & Rosenblatt, L. (1983). The effects of bimodal (sound-light) stimulus presentation on selective responding of deaf-blind multihandicapped children: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 128(3) Jun 1983, 397-401.
  • Knill, C. (1983). Body awareness, communication and development: A programme employing music with the profoundly handicapped: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 6(4) Dec 1983, 489-492.
  • Koga, S. (1995). A scale measuring trainers' skill in Dousa-hou: Scale construction, reliability, and validity: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 33(3) Nov 1995, 13-21.
  • Kondratov, R. R. (1982). Theoretical problems of individual psychological development in works of I. A. Sokolyansky and A. I. Metscheryakov: Voprosy Psychologii No 2 Mar-Apr 1982, 41-50.
  • Konig, M. A. (1986). Early education in multiple disabled children with visual disorders: Fruhforderung interdisziplinar Vol 5(2) 1986, 73-78.
  • Koppenhaver, D. A., Hendrix, M. P., & Williams, A. R. (2007). Toward evidence-based literacy interventions for children with severe and multiple disabilities: Seminars in Speech & Language Vol 28(1) Feb 2007, 79-90.
  • Korkowski, H. (1993). Handicaps and coping processes: Two case reports: Zeitschrift fur Individualpsychologie Vol 18(2) 1993, 155-167.
  • Krasner, P. R., & Silverstein, L. (1976). The Preschool Attainment Record: A concurrent validity study with cerebral palsied children: Educational and Psychological Measurement Vol 36(4) Win 1976, 1049-1054.
  • Kratzer, D. A., Spooner, F., Test, D. W., & Koorland, M. A. (1993). Extending the application of constant time delay: Teaching a requesting skill to students with severe multiple disabilities: Education & Treatment of Children Vol 16(3) Aug 1993, 235-253.
  • Kronick, M. K. (1987). Children and canes: An adaptive approach: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 81(2) Feb 1987, 61-62.
  • Krout, R. (1987). Music therapy with multi-handicapped students: Individualizing treatment within a group setting: Journal of Music Therapy Vol 24(1) Spr 1987, 2-13.
  • Kuharski, T., Rues, J., Cook, D., & Guess, D. (1985). Effects of vestibular stimulation on sitting behaviors among preschoolers with severe handicaps: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 10(3) Fal 1985, 137-145.
  • Kuperman, S., Black, D. W., & Burns, T. L. (1988). Excess mortality among formerly hospitalized child psychiatric patients: Archives of General Psychiatry Vol 45(3) Mar 1988, 277-282.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Abels, J., Wilms, E. H., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Groeneweg, J. (2003). Microswitch responding and awareness of contingency in persons with profound multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 96(3) Jun 2003, 835-838.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Antonucci, M., De Pace, C., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., et al. (2007). Enabling two adolescents with multiple disabilities to choose among environmental stimuli through different procedural and technological approaches: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 105(2) Oct 2007, 362-372.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Belardinelli, M. O., Chiapparino, C., Angelillo, M. T., Stasolla, F., Singh, N. N., et al. (2008). Learning in post-coma persons with profound multiple disabilities: Two case evaluations: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 20(3) Jun 2008, 209-216.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Belardinelli, M. O., Stasolla, F., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., et al. (2008). Promoting engagement, requests and choice by a man with post-coma pervasive motor impairment and minimally conscious state through a technology-based program: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 20(4) Aug 2008, 379-388.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Bellini, D., & Oliva, D. (1993). Building choice opportunities within a robot-assisted occupational program: A case study: Behavioral Residential Treatment Vol 8(3) Jul 1993, 219-226.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Bellini, D., & Oliva, D. (1993). A robot to provide multihandicapped blind persons with physical guidance and activity choices: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 5(4) Dec 1993, 337-348.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Campodonico, F., & Mantini, M. (1998). An automatic prompting system for improving the performance of a woman with multiple disabilities: Scandinavian Journal of Behaviour Therapy Vol 27(4) 1998, 145-148.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Campodonico, F., & Mantini, M. (1999). Promoting mild physical exercise in a person with profound multiple disabilities: Scandinavian Journal of Behaviour Therapy Vol 28(3) 1999, 115-118.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Comes, M. L., Stasolla, F., Manfredi, F., O'Reilly, M. F., & Singh, N. N. (2005). A Microswitch Cluster to Enhance Arm-Lifting Responses Without Dystonic Head Tilting by a Child With Multiple Disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 100(3) Jun 2005, 892-894.
  • Lancioni, G. E., & Coninx, F. (1995). A classical conditioning procedure for auditory testing: Air puff audiometry: Scandinavian Audiology Supplement Vol 24(Suppl 40) 1995, 43-48.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Coninx, F., Manders, N., & Driessen, M. (1989). Use of automatic cueing to reduce drooling in two multihandicapped students: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 2(3) Sep 1989, 201-210.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Coninx, F., Manders, N., Driessen, M., & et al. (1991). Reducing breaks in performance of multihandicapped students through automatic prompting or peer supervision: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 3(2) Jun 1991, 115-128.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Coninx, F., & Smeets, P. M. (1989). A classical conditioning procedure for the hearing assessment of multiply handicapped persons: Journal of Speech & Hearing Disorders Vol 54(1) Feb 1989, 88-93.
  • Lancioni, G. E., & et al. (1984). Effects of gross motor activities on the severe self-injurious tantrums of multihandicapped individuals: Applied Research in Mental Retardation Vol 5(4) 1984, 471-482.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Gigante, A., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Montironi, L. (2000). Indoor travel and simple tasks as physical exercise for people with profound multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 91(1) Aug 2000, 211-216.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Klaase, M., & Goossens, A. (1995). Pictorial vs. auditory prompt systems for promoting independent task performance in adolescents with multiple handicaps: Behavioral Interventions Vol 10(4) Oct 1995, 237-244.
  • Lancioni, G. E., & Mantini, M. (1999). A corrective-feedback system for helping a person with multiple disabilities during indoor travel: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 88(3, Pt 2) Jun 1999, 1291-1295.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Mantini, M., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (1999). An adapted acoustic orientation system for promoting independent indoor travel and activity in persons with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 11(1) Mar 1999, 35-46.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O 'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Campodonico, F., et al. (2007). Helping three persons with multiple disabilities acquire independent dressing through assistive technology: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(12) Dec 2007, 768-773.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O' Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Montironi, G., et al. (2005). Extending the evaluation of a computer system used as a microswitch for word utterances of persons with multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 49(9) Sep 2005, 639-646.
  • Lancioni, G. E., & Oliva, D. (1988). A computer-aided programme for low-functioning persons: A reply to Odor and Aitken: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 32(4) Aug 1988, 265-269.
  • Lancioni, G. E., & Oliva, D. (1988). A computer-aided programme for promoting unsupervized activities for multihandicapped adolescents: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 32(2) Apr 1988, 125-136.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & Bracalente, S. (1994). An electronic guidance system for multihandicapped blind persons: Evaluating its effectiveness and likableness: Behavioral Interventions Vol 9(2) Apr 1994, 93-103.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & O"Reilly, M. F. (1997). Ambulation, object manipulation, and multiple disabilities: Extending the applicability of a robot: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 91(1) Jan-Feb 1997, 53-60.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & Raimondi, D. (1989). Teaching two low-functioning deaf-blind persons to cooperate in activities: Role of a computer-aided program: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 2(1) Mar 1989, 35-42.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & Raimondi, D. (1992). Two multihandicapped blind persons promoting mobility and activity in a passive deaf-blind companion: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 1992, 129-139.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & Signorino, M. (1994). Promoting ambulation and object manipulation in persons with multiple handicaps through the use of a robot: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 79(2) Oct 1994, 843-848.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Oliva, D., & Ten Hoopen, G. (1997). Spoken messages as auditory cues for orientation in promoting indoor travel and activity by persons with multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 85(2) Oct 1997, 403-410.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., & Basili, G. (2001). Use of microswitches and speech output systems with people with severe/profound intellectual or multiple disabilities: A literature review: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 22(1) Jan-Feb 2001, 21-40.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., & Campodonico, F. (2001). Technological resources to support adaptive responding with persons with multiple disabilities: Scandinavian Journal of Behaviour Therapy Vol 30(1) Feb 2001, 17-22.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., & Campodonico, F. (2002). Promoting fluency of performance of self-help tasks with a person with multiple disabilities: Behavioral Interventions Vol 17(1) Jan-Mar 2002, 15-20.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Campodonico, F., & Mantini, M. (2002). Increasing indices of happiness and positive engagement in persons with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 14(3) Sep 2002, 231-237.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Campodonico, F., & Serenelli, S. (2000). Use of anticipatory cues to reduce dependence on physical prompts by an adolescent with multiple disabilities: Scandinavian Journal of Behaviour Therapy Vol 29(1) 2000, 43-47.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Cognini, I., & Serenelli, S. (2001). Cooperative task performance and preferences of people with multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 92(3, Pt 2) Jun 2001, 1199-1201.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., & Mantini, M. (1999). Activity arrangements with or without mobility and performance of persons with profound multiple disabilities over long sessions: Irish Journal of Psychology Vol 20(2-4) 1999, 124-135.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (1997). Instruction strategies for promoting vocational activities: A preliminary assessment of preferences with persons with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 9(2) Jun 1997, 79-89.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Coppa, M. M. (2001). A microswitch for vocalization responses to foster environmental control in children with multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 45(3) Jun 2001, 271-275.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Coppa, M. M. (2001). Using multiple microswitches to promote different responses in children with multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 22(4) Jul-Aug 2001, 309-318.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Pellegrino, A. (1997). Persons with multiple disabilities acquiring independent task performance through a self-operated verbal instruction system: Irish Journal of Psychology Vol 18(4) 1997, 419-429.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Singh, N. N., & Coppa, M. M. (2002). Multiple microswitches for multiple responses with children with profound disabilities: Cognitive Behaviour Therapy Vol 31(2) 2002, 81-87.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., & Basili, G. (2004). Enabling a person with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behaviour to control environmental stimulation with chin movements: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 26(21-22) Nov 2004, 1291-1294.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Campodonico, F., Marziani, M., & Oliva, D. (2004). A microswitch program to foster simple foot and leg movements in adult wheelchair users with multiple disabilities: Cognitive Behaviour Therapy Vol 33(3) 2004, 137-142.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Groeneweg, J., Bosco, A., Tota, A., et al. (2006). A Social Validation Assessment of Microswitch-Based Programs for Persons with Multiple Disabilities Employing Teacher Trainees and Parents as Raters: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 18(4) Dec 2006, 383-391.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Baccani, S., Severini, L., et al. (2006). Micro-switch programmes for students with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behaviour: Assessing response acquisition and choice: Pediatric Rehabilitation Vol 9(2) Apr-Jun 2006, 137-143.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Campodonico, F., & Groeneweg, J. (2003). Stimulation and microswitch-based programs for enhancing indices of happiness: A maintenance assessment: Behavioral Interventions Vol 18(1) Feb 2003, 53-61.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Coppa, M. M., & Montironi, G. (2005). A New Microswitch To Enable A Boy With Minimal Motor Behavior To Control Environmental Stimulation With Eye Blinks: Behavioral Interventions Vol 20(2) Apr 2005, 147-153.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., & Groeneweg, J. (2002). Impact of stimulation versus microswitch-based programs on indices of happiness of people with profound multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 23(2) Mar-Apr 2002, 149-160.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., & Groeneweg, J. (2003). Using microswitches with persons who have profound multiple disabilities: Evaluation of three cases: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 97(3, Pt 1) Dec 2003, 909-916.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Marziani, M., & Groeneweg, J. (2002). A social validation assessment of the use of microswitches with persons with multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 23(5) Sep-Oct 2002, 309-318.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Montironi, G., & Chierchie, S. (2004). Assessing a New Response-microswitch Combination With a Boy With Minimal Motor Behavior: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 98(2) Apr 2004, 459-462.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Piazzolla, G., Gatto, L., et al. (2006). Multiple microswitches for persons with multiple disabilities: A basic procedure to examine the persons' choice behavior: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 102(1) Feb 2006, 13-16.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Piazzolla, G., & Groeneweg, J. (2004). Assessing Influence of Stimulation on Mood and Aberrant Behavior of Persons With Multiple Disabilities During Brief Treadmill Sessions: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 99(3,Part1) Dec 2004, 931-936.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Piazzolla, G., Pirani, P., et al. (2002). Evaluating the use of multiple microswitches and responses for children with multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 46(4) May 2002, 346-351.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Scalini, L., Vigo, C. M., et al. (2005). Further Evaluation of Microswitch Clusters to Enhance Hand Response and Head Control in Persons With Multiple Disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 100(3) Jun 2005, 689-694.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Pidala, S., Piazzolla, G., Oliva, D., et al. (2006). A Social Validation Assessment of Cooperative versus Individual Task Engagement of Persons with Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 100(3) Mar 2006, 169-173.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., & Sigafoos, J. (2006). Promoting fluency of performance during morning dressing by two persons with multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 103(3) Dec 2006, 771-777.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2007). Persons with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behavior using small forehead movements and new microswitch technology to control environmental stimuli: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 104(3, Pt 1) Jun 2007, 870-878.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2007). Small hand-closure movements used as a response through microswitch technology by persons with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behavior: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 104(3, Pt 1) Jun 2007, 1027-1034.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2006). A Microswitch-based Program to Enable Students with Multiple Disabilities to Choose Among Environmental Stimuli: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 100(8) Aug 2006, 488-493.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Antonucci, M., et al. (2008). Microstuitch-based programs for persons with multiple disabilities: An overview of some recent developments: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 106(2) Apr 2008, 355-370.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Baccani, S., et al. (2004). Technological aids to promote basic developmental achievements by children with multiple disabilities: Evaluation of two cases: Cognitive Processing Vol 5(4) Dec 2004, 232-238.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Baccani, S., et al. (2006). Microswitch Clusters Promote Adaptive Responses and Reduce Finger Mouthing in a Boy With Multiple Disabilities: Behavior Modification Vol 30(6) Nov 2006, 892-900.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Severini, L. (2006). Enabling Persons with Multiple Disabilities to Choose Among Environmental Stimuli and Request Stimulus Repetitions Through Microswitch Computer Technology: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 103(2) Oct 2006, 354-362.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Severini, L. (2008). Enabling two persons with multiple disabilities to access environmental stimuli and ask for social contact through microswitches and a VOCA: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 29(1) Jan 2008, 21-28.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Severini, L. (2008). Three persons with multiple disabilities accessing environmental stimuli and asking for social contact through microswitch and VOCA technology: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 52(4) Apr 2008, 327-336.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., Tota, A., Antonucci, M., et al. (2006). Children with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behavior using chin movements to operate microswitches to obtain environmental stimulation: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 27(3) May-Jun 2006, 290-298.
  • Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Stasolla, F., Manfredi, F., & Oliva, D. (2004). Adapting a Grid into a Microswitch to Suit Simple Hand Movements of a Child With Profound Multiple Disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 99(2) Oct 2004, 724-728.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., Oliva, D., Scalini, L., & Groeneweg, J. (2003). Microswitch clusters to enhance non-spastic response schemes with students with multiple disabilities: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 25(6) Mar 2003, 301-304.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Baccani, S., Pidala, S., Oliva, D., et al. (2005). Parents Provide Social Validation of Microswitch Programs for Children and Adults with Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Child and Family Studies Vol 14(2) Jun 2005, 159-165.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Campodonico, F., Oliva, D., & Groeneweg, J. (2004). Effects of automatically delivered stimulation on persons with multiple disabilities during their use of a stationary bicycle: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 98(3,Pt2) Jun 2004, 1363-1367.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Campodonico, F., Piazzolla, G., Scalini, L., et al. (2005). Impact of favorite stimuli automatically delivered on step responses of persons with multiple disabilities during their use of walker devices: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 26(1) Jan-Feb 2005, 71-76.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Campodonico, F., Scalini, L., & Oliva, D. (2003). Extending the use of familiar microswitches to difficult daily situations: Two case evaluations: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 96(3) Jun 2003, 927-930.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (2002). Multiple microswitches for children with multiple disabilities: Assessing response maintenance: Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions Vol 4(2) Spr 2002, 104-107.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (2002). Using a hand-tap response with a vibration microswitch with students with multiple disabilities: Behavioural and Cognitive Psychotherapy Vol 30(2) Apr 2002, 237-242.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (2003). Some Recent Research Efforts on Microswitches for Persons with Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Child and Family Studies Vol 12(3) Sep 2003, 251-256.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (2004). A microswitch program including words and choice opportunities for students with multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 98(1) Feb 2004, 214-222.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., & Oliva, D. (2005). Microswitch programs for persons with multiple disabilities: An overview of the responses adopted for microswitch activation: Cognitive Processing Vol 6(3) Sep 2005, 177-188.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Baccani, S., & Canevaro, A. (2002). Using Simple Hand-Movement Responses with Optic Microswitches with Two Persons with Multiple Disabilities: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 27(4) Win 2002, 276-279.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Basili, G. (2005). An overview of research on increasing indices of happiness of people with severe/profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 27(3) Feb 2005, 83-93.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Campodonico, F., & Groeneweg, J. (2003). Assessing the effects of automatically delivered stimulation on the use of simple exercise tools by students with multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 24(6) Nov-Dec 2003, 475-483.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Campodonico, F., & Groeneweg, J. (2004). Impact of Favorite Stimuli on the Behavior of Persons with Multiple Disabilities While Using a Treadmill: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 98(5) May 2004, 304-309.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Campodonico, F., & Groeneweg, J. (2004). Use of simple exercise tools by students with multiple disabilities: Impact of automatically delivered stimulation on activity level and mood: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 16(2) Jun 2004, 171-178.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Dardanelli, E., & Pirani, P. (2003). Adapting the use of microswitches to foster response awareness and word association: Two case evaluations: Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions Vol 5(3) Sum 2003, 153-157.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Groeneweg, J. (2005). Enabling a Girl with Multiple Disabilities to Control Her Favorite Stimuli Through Vocalization and a Dual-Microphone Microswitch: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 99(3) Mar 2005, 179-182.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Montironi, G. (2004). A Computer System Serving as a Microswitch for Vocal Utterances of Persons with Multiple Disabilities: Two Case Evaluations: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 98(2) Feb 2004, 116-120.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Montrioni, G., Piazza, F., et al. (2004). Using computer systems as microswitches for vocal utterances of persons with multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 25(2) Mar-Apr 2004, 183-192.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Scalini, L., & Groeneweg, J. (2004). Improving Assisted Ambulation in a Man with Multiple Disabilities Through the Use of a Microswitch Cluster: Behavioural and Cognitive Psychotherapy Vol 32(2) Apr 2004, 245-249.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., & Severini, L. (2005). Assessing a microswitch-based stimulation procedure for eye-blinking responses in a young woman with profound multiple disabilities: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 101(1) Aug 2005, 212-216.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Oliva, D., Smaldone, A., Tota, A., et al. (2006). Assessing the effects of stimulation versus microswitch-based programmes on indices of happiness of students with multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 50(10) Oct 2006, 739-747.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Piazzolla, G., Pidala, S., & Oliva, D. (2005). Wheelchair-Bound Persons with Multiple Disabilities Learning to Use Simple Foot-Leg Responses Within a Microswitch-Based Program: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 17(4) Dec 2005, 327-336.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Campodonico, F., & Oliva, D. (2008). Self-management of orientation technology and auditory cues for indoor travel by two persons with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 20(2) Apr 2008, 129-138.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2007). A learning setup for a post-coma adolescent with profound multiple disabilities involving small forehead movements and new microswitch technology: Disability and Rehabilitation: Assistive Technology Vol 2(5) 2007, 293-297.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2008). A girl with multiple disabilities increases object manipulation and reduces hand mouthing through a microswitch-based program: Clinical Case Studies Vol 7(3) Jun 2008, 238-249.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2007). Fostering adaptive responses and head control in students with multiple disabilities through a microswitch-based program: Follow-up assessment and program revision: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 28(2) Mar-Apr 2007, 187-196.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Didden, R., Oliva, D., et al. (2007). Effects of microswitch-based programs on indices of happiness of students with multiple disabilities: A new research evaluation: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 112(3) May 2007, 167-176.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Antonucci, M. (2006). A microswitch-based programme to enable a boy with multiple disabilities and minimal motor behaviour to choose among environmental stimuli: Disability and Rehabilitation: Assistive Technology Vol 1(3) Jun 2006, 205-208.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Baccani, S. (2006). Teaching 'yes' and 'no' responses to children with multiple disabilities through a program including microswitches linked to a vocal output device: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 102(1) Feb 2006, 51-61.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Baccani, S. (2007). Enabling students with multiple disabilities to request and choose among environmental stimuli through microswitch and computer technology: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 28(1) Jan-Feb 2007, 50-58.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Costantini, A., et al. (2006). An optic micro-switch for an eyelid response to foster environmental control in children with minimal motor behaviour: Pediatric Rehabilitation Vol 9(1) Jan-Mar 2006, 53-56.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Gatti, M., et al. (2008). A microswitch-cluster program to foster adaptive responses and head control in students with multiple disabilities: Replication and validation assessment: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 29(4) Jul 2008, 373-384.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., & Montironi, G. (2004). Evaluating a computer system used as a microswitch for word utterances of persons with multiple disabilities: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 26(21-22) Nov 2004, 1286-1290.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Piazzolla, G., et al. (2007). Automatically delivered stimulation for walker-assisted step responses: Measuring its effects in persons with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 19(1) Feb 2007, 1-13.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Pidala, S., et al. (2007). Promoting adaptive foot movements and reducing hand mouthing and eye poking in a boy with multiple disabilities through microswitch technology: Cognitive Behaviour Therapy Vol 36(2) 2007, 85-90.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Scalini, L., et al. (2007). Promoting foot-leg movements in children with multiple disabilities through the use of support devices and technology for regulating contingent stimulation: Cognitive Processing Vol 8(4) Dec 2007, 279-283.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., Severini, L., et al. (2007). Microswitch technology to promote adaptive responses and reduce mouthing in two children with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 628-636.
  • Lancioni, G. E., Van Dijk, J., Driessen, M., & Manders, N. (1988). An automatic prompting instrument to increase task-related responding in low-functioning individuals: Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry Vol 19(4) Dec 1988, 267-273.
  • Lang, C., & Remington, D. (1994). Treatment with propranolol of severe self-injurious behavior in a blind, deaf, and retarded adolescent: Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry Vol 33(2) Feb 1994, 265-269.
  • Lasseter, J., Privette, G., Brown, C. C., & Duer, J. (1989). Dance as a treatment approach with a multidisabled child: Implications for school counseling: School Counselor Vol 36(4) Mar 1989, 310-315.
  • Lattimore, J., Stephens, T. E., Favell, J. E., & Risley, T. R. (1984). Increasing direct care staff compliance to individualized physical therapy body positioning prescriptions: Prescriptive checklists: Mental Retardation Vol 22(2) Apr 1984, 79-84.
  • Lavigueur, S., & Laurendeau, R. (1991). Collaboration between child care workers and families: A choice that modifies the attitude of the educators: Revue Canadienne de Psycho-Education Vol 20(2) 1991, 123-137.
  • Leatherby, J. G., Gast, D. L., Wolery, M., & Collins, B. C. (1992). Assessment of reinforcer preference in multi-handicapped students: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(1) Mar 1992, 15-36.
  • Leclerc, R., & St-Denis, C. (1992). Reorientation of a stereotypical behavior of a multiply handicapped child by means of positive reinforcement: Canadian Journal of Rehabilitation Vol 6(2) Win 1992, 99-104.
  • Lee, J. M., Mahler, T. J., & Westling, D. L. (1985). Reducing occurrences of an asymmetrical tonic neck reflex: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 89(6) May 1985, 617-621.
  • Lengyel, L. M., Domaracki, J. W., & Lyon, S. R. (1990). General case simulation instruction of generalized housekeeping skills in blind, multihandicapped adults: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 84(4) Apr 1990, 166-170.
  • Lennan, R. K. (1973). The deaf multi-handicapped unit at the California School for the Deaf, Riverside: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 118(3) Jun 1973, 439-445.
  • Lennerstrand, G., Axelsson, A., & Andersson, G. (1983). Visual testing with "preferential looking" in mentally retarded children: Behavioural Brain Research Vol 10(1) Oct 1983, 199-202.
  • Lewin, L. M., Lundervold, D., Saslow, M., & Thompson, S. (1989). Reducing eating dependency in nursing home patients: The effects of prompting, reinforcement, food preference and environmental design: Journal of Clinical & Experimental Gerontology Vol 11(1-2) Mar-Jun 1989, 47-63.
  • Lewis, M., & Brooks-Gunn, J. (1984). Age and handicapped group differences in infants' visual attention: Child Development Vol 55(3) Jun 1984, 858-868.
  • Lewis, M., Feiring, C., & Brooks-Gunn, J. (1988). Young children's social networks as a function of age and dysfunction: Infant Mental Health Journal Vol 9(2) Sum 1988, 142-157.
  • Lewis, S., & Hatlen, P. (1995). A caution against generalizations: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 89(1) Jan-Feb 1995, 90-91.
  • Li, A. (2003). A Model for Developing Programs to Improve the Use of Vision in Students Who Are Visually Impaired With Multiple Disabilities: RE:view Vol 35(1) Spr 2003, 31-47.
  • Liberti, G. (1984). Developing spatial-movement concepts in multiply handicapped students: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 78(3) Mar 1984, 121-122.
  • Lieberman, L. J., & Houston-Wilson, C. (1999). Overcoming the barriers to including students with visual impairments and deaf-blindness in physical education: RE:view Vol 31(3) Fal 1999, 129-138.
  • Lindberg, B., & Rasmussen, D. (1994). Method development with parent groups: Psykologisk Paedagogisk Radgivning Vol 31(1) Feb 1994, 21-25.
  • Linn, D. M., Rojahn, J., Helsel, W. J., & Dixon, J. (1988). Acute effects of transcutaneous electric nerve stimulation on self-injurious behavior: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 1(2) Jun 1988, 105-119.
  • Logan, K. R., & Gast, D. L. (2001). Conducting preference assessments and reinforcer testing for individuals with profound multiple disabilities: Issues and procedures: Exceptionality Vol 9(3) 2001, 123-134.
  • Logan, K. R., Jacobs, H. A., Gast, D. L., Smith, P. D., Daniel, J., & Rawls, J. (2001). Preferences and reinforcers for students with profound multiple disabilities: Can we identify them? : Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 13(2) Jun 2001, 97-122.
  • Lohrmann-O'Rourke, S., Browder, D. M., & Brown, F. (2000). Guidelines for conducting socially valid systematic preference assessments: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(1) Spr 2000, 42-53.
  • Luckner, J. L., & Carter, K. (2001). Essential competencies for teaching students with hearing loss and additional disabilities: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 146(1) Mar 2001, 7-15.
  • Lueck, A. H. (1998). Incorporating unique learning requirements into the design of instructional strategies for students with visual and multiple impairments: The basis for an expanded core curriculum: RE:view Vol 30(3) Fal 1998, 101-116.
  • Luiselli, J. K. (1987). Secondary diurnal enuresis: Evaluation of cueing and reinforcement interventions with a sensory-impaired youth: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 31(3) Sep 1987, 287-292.
  • Luiselli, J. K. (1988). Behavioral feeding intervention with deaf-blind, multihandicapped children: Child & Family Behavior Therapy Vol 10(4) 1988, 49-62.
  • Luiselli, J. K. (1988). Improvement of feeding skills in multihandicapped students through paced-prompting interventions: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 1(1) Mar 1988, 17-30.
  • Luiselli, J. K. (1988). Positive reinforcement interventions in the classroom: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 82(1) Jan 1988, 17-20.
  • Luiselli, J. K. (1994). Toilet training in children with sensory impairments in a residential school setting: Behavioral Interventions Vol 9(2) Apr 1994, 105-114.
  • Luiselli, J. K. (1998). Treatment of self-injurious hand-mouthing in a child with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 10(2) Jun 1998, 167-174.
  • Luiselli, J. K. (2007). Single-Case Evaluation of a Negative Reinforcement Toilet Training Intervention: Child & Family Behavior Therapy Vol 29(1) 2007, 59-69.
  • Luiselli, J. K., Beltis, J. A., & Bass, J. (1989). Clinical analysis of naltrexone in the treatment of self-injurious behavior: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 2(1) Mar 1989, 43-50.
  • Luiselli, J. K., Evans, T. P., & Boyce, D. A. (1985). Contingency management of food selectivity and oppositional eating in a multiply handicapped child: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 14(2) Sum 1985, 153-156.
  • Luiselli, J. K., & Lolli, D. A. (1987). Contingency management of a blind child's disruptive behaviors during mobility instruction: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 19(2) Sum 1987, 65-70.
  • Luiselli, J. K., Myles, E., Evans, T. P., & Boyce, D. A. (1985). Reinforcement control of severe dysfunctional behavior of blind, multihandicapped students: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 90(3) Nov 1985, 328-334.
  • Lyons, G. (2005). The Life Satisfaction Matrix: An instrument and procedure for assessing the subjective quality of life of individuals with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 49(10) Oct 2005, 766-769.
  • Ma, A. (1995). Effecting systems changes through consultation and collaboration: School Psychology International Vol 16(3) Aug 1995, 249-263.
  • Mac Neela, J. C. (1987). An overview of therapeutic positioning for multiply-handicapped persons, including augmentative communication users: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 7(2) Sum 1987, 39-60.
  • MacCuspie, P. A., Harmer, D., McConnell, J., Fricker, J., & et al. (1993). Short-term placements: A crucial role for residential schools: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 87(6) Jun 1993, 193-198.
  • Macdonald, J. (1984). Problems encountered by a child with congenital limb deformities: British Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 47(7) Jul 1984, 204-207.
  • Macdonald, R. J. (1985). On gaining independence as a deaf-blind person: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(5) May 1985, 205-208.
  • Macfarlane, C. A., Young, K. R., & West, R. P. (1987). An integrated school/home overcorrection procedure for eliminating stereotypic behavior in students with severe multiple handicaps: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 22(3) Sep 1987, 156-166.
  • Maes, B., Lambrechts, G., Hostyn, I., & Petry, K. (2007). Quality-enhancing interventions for people with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: A review of the empirical research literature: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 32(3) Sep 2007, 163-178.
  • Mahoney, D. J. (1976). A review of jobs undertaken by the mentally retarded: Australian Journal of Mental Retardation Vol 4(1) Mar 1976, 24-27.
  • Makus, H., & Makus, L. (1979). Play-therapy with a multiply-handicapped child: Praxis der Kinderpsychologie und Kinderpsychiatrie Vol 28(2) Feb-Mar 1979, 47-51.
  • Malakpa, S. W. G. (1994). Job placement of blind and visually impaired people with additional disabilities: RE:view Vol 26(2) Sum 1994, 69-77.
  • Mall, W., Amon, P., Beck, B., Castell, R., & et al. (1993). Multiple diagnoses and risks among primary school children: Zeitschrift fur Kinder- und Jugendpsychiatrie und Psychotherapie Vol 21(1) Mar 1993, 14-20.
  • Maloney, F. P., & Kurtz, P. A. (1982). The use of a mercury switch head control device in profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped children: Physical & Occupational Therapy in Pediatrics Vol 2(4) Win 1982, 11-17.
  • Mamer, L. (1999). Visual development in students with visual and additional impairments: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 93(6) Jun 1999, 360-369.
  • Markowitz, J. B., Hebbeler, K., Larson, J. C., Cooper, J. A., & et al. (1991). Using value-added analysis to examine short-term effects of early intervention: Journal of Early Intervention Vol 15(4) Fal 1991, 377-389.
  • Maroldt, B. (2003). "My hands won't do it!" - Individual music therapy in a case of Rett Syndrome: Musiktherapeutische Umschau Vol 24(3) 2003, 215-226.
  • Martin, M., & Horsfall, D. (1987). Training work skills for students with severe and multiple handicapping conditions: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 13(3) Sep 1987, 151-159.
  • Marvin, C. (1994). Home literacy experiences of preschool children with single and multiple disabilities: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 14(4) Win 1994, 436-454.
  • Mathy-Laikko, P., Iacono, T., Ratcliff, A., Villarruel, F., & et al. (1989). Teaching a child with multiple disabilities to use a tactile augmentative communication device: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 5(4) Dec 1989, 249-256.
  • Matsumoto, Y. (1989). Changes of heart-rate before and after self-stimulated behavior on 2 severely-multiply handicapped: Japanese Journal of Physiological Psychology and Psychophysiology Vol 7(1) Jun 1989, 47-52.
  • Mattie, H. D., & Kozen, A. A. (2007). Consideration of behavior states and patterns in IEP development and daily planning: A multiple case study approach involving students with multiple disabilities: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 42(1) Mar 2007, 38-47.
  • Maurizi, M., Ottaviani, F., & Paludetti, G. (1995). Objective methods of hearing assessment: An introduction: Scandinavian Audiology Supplement Vol 24(Suppl 40) 1995, 5-7.
  • McCarran, M. S., & Andrasik, F. (1990). Behavioral weight-loss for multiply-handicapped adults: Assessing caretaker involvement and measures of behavior change: Addictive Behaviors Vol 15(1) 1990, 13-20.
  • McCarron, L. T. (1984). Assessment of learning style: The Perceptual Memory Task: Vocational Evaluation & Work Adjustment Bulletin Vol 17(2) Sum 1984, 52-58.
  • McConachie, H. R., & Sinason, V. (1989). The emotional experience of multiple handicap: Issues in assessment: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 15(1) Jan-Feb 1989, 75-78.
  • McConkey, R., Mariga, L., Braadland, N., & Mphole, P. (2000). Parents as trainers about disability in low income countries: International Journal of Disability, Development and Education Vol 47(3) Sep 2000, 310-317.
  • McCracken, W. M., & Bamford, J. M. (1995). Auditory prostheses for children with multiple handicaps: Scandinavian Audiology Supplement Vol 24(Suppl 40) 1995, 51-60.
  • McDonnell, J. (1987). The integration of students with severe handicaps into regular public schools: An analysis of parents perceptions of potential outcomes: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 22(2) Jun 1987, 98-111.
  • McDonnell, J., Thorson, N., & McQuivey, C. (2000). Comparison of the instructional contexts of students with severe disabilities and their peers in general education classes: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(1) Spr 2000, 54-58.
  • McDonnell, J., Thorson, N., McQuivey, C., & Kiefer-O'Donnell, R. (1997). Academic engaged time of students with low-incidence disabilities in general education classes: Mental Retardation Vol 35(1) Feb 1997, 18-26.
  • McGinnity, B. L. (1985). Community-based training: A component of career education for deaf-blind youth: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(10) Dec 1985, 466-467.
  • McLean, E. (1984). Ward teaching won't dop: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 10(5) Sep-Oct 1984, 261-271.
  • McNeill, A. W., & Mulholland, R. (1986). Consolidation memory theory applied to relearning motor skills in profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped children: Adapted Physical Activity Quarterly Vol 3(4) Oct 1986, 342-350.
  • Meacham, F. R., Kline, M. M., Stovall, J. A., & Sands, D. I. (1987). Adaptive behavior and low incidence handicaps: Hearing and visual impairments: The Journal of Special Education Vol 21(1) Spr 1987, 183-196.
  • Meadow, K. P. (1984). Social adjustment of preschool children: Deaf and hearing, with and without other handicaps: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 3(4) Jan 1984, 27-40.
  • Meadows, A. (2002). Approaches to music and movement for children with severe and profound multiple disabilities: Australian Journal of Music Therapy Vol 13 2002, 17-27.
  • Mellstrom, B. P., Saunders, M. D., Saunders, R. R., & Olswang, L. B. (2005). Interaction of Behavioral State and Microswitch Use in Individuals With Profound Multiple Impairments: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 17(1) Mar 2005, 35-53.
  • Merbler, J. B., & Harley, R. K. (1976). Implementation of a precision teaching data collection system in a program for multiply handicapped visually impaired children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 8(4) Win 1976-1977, 97-102.
  • Merucci, M. (2004). Accompanying aging people with multiple disabilities through the complex interaction: individual-family-institution: Therapie Familiale Vol 25(4) 2004, 601-610.
  • Migden, S. (1983). Issues in concurrent psychotherapy-remediation: Annals of Dyslexia Vol 33 1983, 275-288.
  • Mikhaylov, F. T., & Kondratov, R. R. (1982). Communication as a functional organ of the development of the psyche: Novye Issledovaniya v Psikhologii Vol 2(27) 1982, 3-7.
  • Milaat, W. A., Ghabrah, T. M., Salem Al-Bar, H. M., Abalkhail, B. A., & Kordy, M. N. (2001). Population-based survey of childhood disability in Eastern Jeddah using the ten questions tool: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 23(5) Mar 2001, 199-203.
  • Min, C. (2007). Developing vocational and transition programs for students who are visually impaired with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 659-661.
  • Mira, M. (1977). Tracking the motor behavior development of multihandicapped infants: Mental Retardation Vol 15(3) Jun 1977, 32-37.
  • Mira, M., & Hoffman, S. (1974). Educational programing for multihandicapped deaf-blind children: Exceptional Children Vol 40(7) Apr 1974, 513-514.
  • Mizrachi, N. (2001). When the hospital becomes home: Visibility, knowledge, and power at Nila: Journal of Contemporary Ethnography Vol 30(2) Apr 2001, 209-239.
  • Moersch, M. S. (1977). Training the deaf-blind child: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 31(7) Aug 1977, 425-431.
  • Morrow, L. W. (1985). Teaching self-control to dually diagnosed deaf students: Promising procedures: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 130(6) Dec 1985, 502-507.
  • Morrow, L. W., Burke, J. G., & Buell, B. J. (1985). Effects of a self-recording procedure on the attending to task behavior and academic productivity of adolescents with multiple handicaps: Mental Retardation Vol 23(3) Jun 1985, 137-141.
  • Morse, M. (1991). Visual gaze behaviors: Considerations in working with visually impaired multiply handicapped children: RE:view Vol 23(1) Spr 1991, 5-15.
  • Morse, M. T. (1990). Cortical visual impairment in young children with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 84(5) May 1990, 200-203.
  • Morse, M. T. (1992). Augmenting assessment procedures for children with severe multiple handicaps and sensory impairments: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 86(1) Jan 1992, 73-77.
  • Mu, K., Siegel, E. B., & Allinder, R. M. (2000). Peer interactions and sociometric status of high school students with moderate or severe disabilities in general education classrooms: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(3) Fal 2000, 142-152.
  • Mulholland, R., & McNeil, A. W. (1989). Heart rate responses of profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped children during closed-skill fine motor and open-skill gross motor activities: Adapted Physical Activity Quarterly Vol 6(1) Jan 1989, 68-78.
  • Mulholland, R., & McNeill, A. W. (1985). Cardiovascular responses of three profoundly retarded, multiply handicapped children during selected motor activities: Adapted Physical Activity Quarterly Vol 2(2) Apr 1985, 151-160.
  • Munkacsi, M. (1981). Educational opportunities for severely/profoundly handicapped children within the Calgary Board of Education: Mental Retardation Bulletin Vol 9(2-3) 1981, 112-121.
  • Murdoch, H. (1984). Maternal rubella: The implications: AEP (Association of Educational Psychologists) Journal Vol 6(5) Win 1984, 3-6.
  • Murphy, K. M., Saunders, M. D., Saunders, R. R., & Olswang, L. B. (2004). Effects of ambient stimuli on measures of behavioral state and microswitch use in adults with profound multiple impairments: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 25(4) Jul-Aug 2004, 355-370.
  • Murphy, R. J., & Doughty, N. R. (1977). Establishment of controlled arm movements in profoundly retarded students using response contingent vibratory stimulation: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 82(2) Sep 1977, 212-216.
  • Murray, J. N., & New, F. (1978). A goal of full service for handicapped students: Education Vol 98(3) Mar-Apr 1978, 325-333.
  • Murray, M., Clarke, S., & Worcester, J. (2002). A teacher's perspective of using PBS in a classroom for a girl with multiple disabilities: Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions Vol 4(3) Sum 2002, 189-192.
  • Musick, P. L. (1976). Special child--special growth: Developmental art therapy: Art Psychotherapy Vol 3(3-4) 1976, 135-144.
  • Nakken, H. (1993). Perspectives and goals: Central issues in intervention: Issues in Special Education & Rehabilitation Vol 8(1) 1993, 37-44.
  • Nakken, H., & den Ouden, W. J. (1985). Research on a psychomotor program for children with severe motor or multiple disabilities: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 8(1) 1985, 47-60.
  • Nakken, H., & Vlaskamp, C. (2007). A need for a taxonomy for profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 83-87.
  • Neff, J. (1979). Another perspective on sexuality and those who are deaf and blind: Sexuality and Disability Vol 2(3) Fal 1979, 206-210.
  • Neilson, A., Hogg, J., Malek, M., & Rowley, D. (2000). Impact of surgical and orthotic intervention on the quality of life of people with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities and their carers: Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 13(4) 2000, 216-238.
  • Neistadt, M. E., & Marques, K. (1984). An Independent Living Skills Training Program: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 38(10) Oct 1984, 671-676.
  • Nelson, C., van Dijk, J., McDonnell, A. P., & Thompson, K. (2002). A framework for understanding young children with severe multiple disabilities: The van Dijk approach to assessment: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 27(2) Sum 2002, 97-111.
  • Nigro, G. (1974). Recreation and adult education: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 35(9) Sep 1974, 268-271.
  • Niimi, A., & Uemura, K. (1987). Stresses on the parents of a handicapped child of school age: Analysis of stress patterns and description of representative mothers' stresses: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 25(2) Sep 1987, 29-38.
  • Norris, J. A., & Hoffman, P. R. (1990). Comparison of adult-initiated vs. child-initiated interaction styles with handicapped prelanguage children: Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools Vol 21(1) Jan 1990, 28-36.
  • Norton, Y. (1975). Neurodevelopment and sensory integration for the profoundly retarded multiply handicapped child: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 29(2) Feb 1975, 93-100.
  • Nwuga, V. C. (1985). A study of group-self identification among the disabled in Nigeria: A case for support groups: International Journal of Rehabilitation Research Vol 8(1) 1985, 61-67.
  • O'Brien, P. J. (1979). Evaluation of a transitional training program for mentally retarded, multiply handicapped high school students: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 40(8) Aug 1979, 232-235.
  • O'Brien, Y., Glenn, S., & Cunningham, C. (1994). Contingency awareness in infants and children with severe and profound learning disabilities: International Journal of Disability, Development and Education Vol 41(3) 1994, 231-243.
  • O'Donnell, B. (1976). Resident rights interview: Mental Retardation Vol 14(6) Dec 1976, 13-17.
  • Odor, J. P. (1988). Student models in machine-mediated learning: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 32(4) Aug 1988, 247-256.
  • Ohwaki, S., & Zingarelli, G. (1988). Feeding clients with severe multiple handicaps in a skilled nursing care facility: Mental Retardation Vol 26(1) Feb 1988, 21-24.
  • Olivares, X. (1990). Approach to the body image experienced by children with multiple handicaps through fairy tales: Bulletin de la Societe du Rorschach et des Methodes Projectives de Langue Francaise No 34 Jun 1990, 97-110.
  • Oliver, G., & Mazer, G. (1982). The Child Development School-Grande Prairie: A school for severely and multiply handicapped children: Mental Retardation Bulletin Vol 10(2-3) 1982, 69-87.
  • Olsson, C. (2004). Dyadic Interaction with a Child with Multiple Disabilities: A System Theory Perspective on Communication: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 20(4) Dec 2004, 228-242.
  • Olsson, C. (2005). The Use of Communicative Functions among Pre-school Children with Multiple Disabilities in Two Different Setting Conditions: Group Versus Individual Patterns: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 21(1) Mar 2005, 3-18.
  • Oreb, I. J., Antunovic, A., & Celizic, M. (2006). Components of oral-motor stimulation program: Hrvatska Revija Za Rehabilitacijska Istrazivanja Vol 42(1) 2006, 105-112.
  • Osguthorpe, R. T., & Chang, L. L. (1988). The effects of computerized symbol processor instruction on the communication skills of nonspeaking students: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 4(1) Mar 1988, 23-34.
  • Oswin, M. (1977). Physically handicapped children in long-stay hospitals: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 3(5) Sep-Oct 1977, 349-355.
  • Page, C. M., Bornhoeft, D. M., Barcome, D. F., & Knowlton, D. D. (1985). Providing outreach services in a rural setting utilizing a multidisciplinary team: The CARES Project: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 46(9-10) Sep-Oct 1985, 264-267.
  • Papageorgiou, D., Andreou, Y., & Soulis, S. (2008). The evaluation of a ten-week programme in Cyprus to integrate children with multiple disabilities and visual impairments into a mainstream primary school: Support for Learning Vol 23(1) Feb 2008, 19-25.
  • Parent, G., & Pare, C. (2003). Need analysis and measure of quality of life of people suffering of blindness and deafness related to mental retardation: Revue Francophone de la Deficience Intellectuelle Vol 14(1) Jun 2003, 5-39.
  • Parsons, M. B., Reid, D. H., & Green, C. W. (2001). Situational assessment of task preferences among adults with multiple severe disabilities in supported work: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 26(1) Spr 2001, 50-55.
  • Parsons, M. B., Reid, D. H., Green, C. W., & Browning, L. B. (2001). Reducing job coach assistance for supported workers with severe multiple disabilities: An alternative off-site/on-site model: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 22(2) Mar-Apr 2001, 151-164.
  • Parsons, M. B., Reid, D. H., Green, C. W., Browning, L. B., & Hensley, M. B. (2002). Evaluation of a shared-work program for reducing assistance provided to supported workers with severe multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 23(1) Jan-Feb 2002, 1-16.
  • Pasemann, M. (1989). Multiple handicap and every day relation: Fruhforderung interdisziplinar Vol 8(1) 1989, 19-26.
  • Pawelski, C. E., & Groveman, A. B. (1982). The community based model for life skills training: Pointer Vol 26(4) Sum 1982, 21-24.
  • Peck, C. A., Donaldson, J., & Pezzoli, M. (1990). Some benefits nonhandicapped adolescents perceive for themselves from their social relationships with peers who have severe handicaps: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 15(4) Win 1990, 241-249.
  • Pellock, J. M., & Morton, L. D. (2000). Treatment of epilepsy in the multiply handicapped: Mental Retardation and Developmental Disabilities Research Reviews Vol 6(4) 2000, 309-323.
  • Penfold, P. S. (1982). Children of battered women: International Journal of Mental Health Vol 11(1-2) Spr-Sum 1982, 108-114.
  • Perla, F., & Ducret, W. D. (1999). Guidelines for teaching orientation and mobility to children with multiple disabilities: RE:view Vol 31(3) Fal 1999, 113-119.
  • Perry, M. M. R. (2003). Relating Improvisational Music Therapy with Severely and Multiply Disabled Children to Communication Development: Journal of Music Therapy Vol 40(3) Fal 2003, 227-246.
  • Peters, R. H., Koller, J. R., & Holliday, G. A. (1995). A functional assessment approach to strategy development and implementation for a person with a specific learning disability: A case study: Journal of Applied Rehabilitation Counseling Vol 26(3) Fal 1995, 30-35.
  • Petitpierre, G., Wolf, D., Dietrich, A., Benz, M., & Adler, J. (2007). Integration of education and care given to children with profound multiple disabilities in Switzerland: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 141-151.
  • Petitpierre-Jost, G. (2005). Multisensory procedures for individuals with profound and multiple disabilities: How to improve the setting of educational and therapeutic provision: Devenir Vol 17(1) 2005, 39-53.
  • Petry, K., & Maes, B. (2006). Identifying expressions of pleasure and displeasure by persons with profound and multiple disabilities: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 31(1) Mar 2006, 28-38.
  • Petry, K., & Maes, B. (2007). Description of the support needs of people with profound multiple disabilities using the 2002 AAMR System: An overview of literature: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 42(2) Jun 2007, 130-143.
  • Petry, K., Maes, B., & Vlaskamp, C. (2005). Domains of Quality of Life of People with Profound Multiple Disabilities: The Perspective of Parents and Direct Support Staff: Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 18(1) Mar 2005, 35-46.
  • Petry, K., Maes, B., & Vlaskamp, C. (2007). Operationalizing quality of life for people with profound multiple disabilities: A Delphi study: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 51(5) May 2007, 334-349.
  • Petry, K., Maes, B., & Vlaskamp, C. (2007). Support characteristics associated with the quality of life of people with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: The perspective of parents and direct support staff: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 104-110.
  • Pfeifer, M. (1989). A step in the right direction: Suggested strategies for implementing music therapy with the multihandicapped child: Music Therapy Perspectives Vol 6 1989, 57-60.
  • Pfister, G. (2004). Palliative care of the multiply disabled person: INFO Kara: Revue Internationale Francophone de Soins Palliatifs Vol 19(3) 2004, 125-128.
  • Piazza, C. C., Fisher, W. W., Hagopian, L. P., Bowman, L. G., & Toole, L. (1996). Using a choice assessment to predict reinforcer effectiveness: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 29(1) Spr 1996, 1-9.
  • Pierce, D., & Frank, G. (1992). A mother's work: Two levels of feminist analysis of family-centered care: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 46(11) Nov 1992, 972-980.
  • Porter, J., Ouvry, C., Morgan, M., & Downs, C. (2001). Interpreting the communication of people with profound and multiple learning difficulties: British Journal of Learning Disabilities Vol 29(1) Mar 2001, 12-16.
  • Potenski, D. H. (1993). Use of blacklight as visual stimulation for people with profound mental retardation and multiple handicaps: Mental Retardation Vol 31(2) Apr 1993, 111-115.
  • Potter, M. L. (1992). Research on teacher thinking: Implications for mainstreaming students with multiple handicaps: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 1992, 115-127.
  • Presland, J. (1989). Children with profound handicaps: A role for educational psychologists: AEP (Association of Educational Psychologists) Journal Vol 5(2) Jul 1989, 79-86.
  • Progar, P. R., North, S. T., Bruce, S. S., DiNovi, B. J., Nau, P. A., Eberman, E. M., et al. (2001). Putative behavioral history effects and aggression maintained by escape from therapists: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 34(1) Spr 2001, 69-72.
  • Radan, M. (1997). An interdisciplinary intervention model for multiply disabled children: Revue Roumaine de Psychologie Vol 41(1) Jan-Jun 1997, 45-58.
  • Rader, B., Shapiro, H. L., & Rodin, E. A. (1978). On placement of multiply handicapped clients into the open job market: Rehabilitation Literature Vol 39(10) Oct 1978, 299-302.
  • Raff-Lichtenberger, H. (2002). Outpatient music therapy: Service provision in a complex field: Musiktherapeutische Umschau Vol 23(4) 2002, 388-398.
  • Randall, J., Masalsky, C., & Luiselli, J. K. (2002). Behavioural intervention to increase oral food consumption in an adult with multiple disability and gastrostomy tube supplementation: Journal of Intellectual & Developmental Disability Vol 27(1) Mar 2002, 5-13.
  • Ranieri, L., Ford, A., Vincent, L., & Brown, L. (1984). 1:1 versus 1:3 instruction of severely multihandicapped students: RASE: Remedial & Special Education Vol 5(5) Sep-Oct 1984, 23-28.
  • Realon, R. E., Favell, J. E., & Dayvault, K. A. (1988). Evaluating the use of adapted leisure materials on the engagement of persons who are profoundly, multiply handicapped: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 23(3) Sep 1988, 228-237.
  • Realon, R. E., Favell, J. E., & Lowerre, A. (1990). The effects of making choices on engagement levels with persons who are profoundly multiply handicapped: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 25(3) Sep 1990, 299-305.
  • Realon, R. E., & Konarski, E. A. (1993). Using decelerative contingencies to reduce the self-injurious behavior of people with multiple handicaps: The effects of response satiation? : Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 14(5) Sep-Oct 1993, 341-357.
  • Rees, R. J. (1991). The development of an assessment instrument for persons with severe and multiple disabilities: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 17(4) 1991, 413-416.
  • Rees, R. J., Home, C. J., & Beswick, M. (1995). The role of physical management and handling in facilitating skills acquisition and learning by people with severe and multiple disabilities: Australia & New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 20(4) 1995, 313-325.
  • Reese, G. M., & Snell, M. E. (1991). Putting on and removing coats and jackets: The acquisition and maintenance of skills by children with severe multiple disabilities: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 26(4) Dec 1991, 398-410.
  • Reeves, M. (1979). Phases of parental coping with a handicapped child: Some practice considerations: School Social Work Quarterly Vol 1(4) Win 1979, 285-293.
  • Reid, D. H., Everson, J. M., & Green, C. W. (1999). A systematic evaluation of preferences identified through person-centered planning for people with profound multiple disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 32(4) Win 1999, 467-477.
  • Reid, D. H., Green, C. W., & Parsons, M. B. (1998). A comparison of supported work versus center-based program services on selected outcomes for individuals with multiple severe disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 23(1) Spr 1998, 69-76.
  • Reid, D. H., Green, C. W., & Parsons, M. B. (2003). An outcome management program for extending advances in choice research into choice opportunities for supported workers with severe multiple disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 36(4) Win 2003, 575-578.
  • Reid, D. H., & Hurlbut, B. (1977). Teaching nonvocal communication skills to multihandicapped retarded adults: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 10(4) Win 1977, 591-603.
  • Reid, D. H., Parsons, M. A., & Green, C. A. (1998). Identifying work peferences among individuals with severe multiple disabilities prior to beginning supported work: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 31(2) Sum 1998, 281-285.
  • Reid, D. H., Parsons, M. B., Green, C. W., & Browning, L. B. (2001). Increasing one aspect of self-determination among adults with severe multiple disabilities in supported work: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 34(3) Fal 2001, 341-344.
  • Reid, D. H., Phillips, J. F., & Green, C. W. (1991). Teaching persons with profound multiple handicaps: A review of the effects of behavioral research: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 24(2) Sum 1991, 319-336.
  • Reiman, J., Bullis, M., Davis, C., & Cole, A. B. (1991). "Lower-achieving" deaf people: Overview and case study: Volta Review Vol 93(5) Sep 1991, 99-120.
  • Remington, R. E., Foxen, T., & Hogg, J. (1977). Auditory reinforcement in profoundly retarded multiply handicapped children: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 82(3) Nov 1977, 299-304.
  • Rhoades, E. A., Price, F., & Perigoe, C. B. (2004). The Changing American Family & Ethnically Diverse Children with Hearing Loss and Multiple Needs: Volta Review Vol 104(4) 2004, 285-305.
  • Ribner, S., Bittlingmaier, B., & Breslin, E. T. (1976). A comparison of parent and teacher perceptions of the behavior of exceptional children: Journal of Educational Research Vol 69(9) May-Jun 1976, 345-348.
  • Richman, J. S., & Kozlowski, N. L. (1977). Operant training of head control and beginning language for a severely developmentally disabled child: Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry Vol 8(4) Dec 1977, 437-440.
  • Rider, R. A., & Candeletti, G. (1982). Influence of motor therapy on children with multisensory disabilities: A preliminary study: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 55(3, Pt 1) Dec 1982, 809-810.
  • Rieu, P., Tomkiewicz, S., Kafe, H., & Roland, T. (1971). Severe mental retardation: Study of 200 children admitted to the department for the chronic sick of the Paris Public Assistance: Revue de Neuropsychiatrie Infantile et d'Hygiene Mentale de l'Enfance Vol 19(3-4) Mar 1971, 115-149.
  • Rittenhouse, R. K. (1983). The acquisition of a functional vocabulary in severely disabled children using systematic sign language instruction: Journal of the American Deafness and Rehabilitation Association Vol 17(3) Dec 1983, 1-3.
  • Roberts, S., Arthur-Kelly, M., Foreman, P., & Pascoe, S. (2005). Educational approaches for maximizing arousal in children with multiple and severe disability: New directions for research and practice in early childhood contexts: Pediatric Rehabilitation Vol 8(2) Apr-Jun 2005, 88-91.
  • Robinson, R. O. (1973). The frequency of other handicaps in children with cerebral palsy: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 15(3) Jun 1973, 305-312.
  • Rodi, M. S., & Hughes, C. (2000). Teaching communication book use to a high school student using a milieu approach: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(3) Fal 2000, 175-179.
  • Rogow, S. M. (1973). Speech development and the blind multi-impaired child: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 5(4) Dec 1973, 105-109.
  • Rogow, S. M. (1980). Language development in blind multihandicapped children: A model of co-active intervention: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 6(5) Sep-Oct 1980, 301-308.
  • Rogow, S. M. (1982). Rhythms and rhymes: Developing communication in very young blind and multihandicapped children: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 8(5) Sep-Oct 1982, 249-260.
  • Rogow, S. M. (1994). Language development in a non-vocal child: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 20(5) Sep-Oct 1994, 339-348.
  • Rogow, S. W. (1984). The uses of social routines to facilitate communication in visually impaired and multihandicapped children: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 3(4) Jan 1984, 64-70.
  • Rohde, J., Farmer, R., Glover, G., & Nursey, A. (1989). A method of displaying assessment information about people with multiple handicaps as a disability profile: Journal of Mental Deficiency Research Vol 33(1) Feb 1989, 95-98.
  • Rose, K. C., White, J. A., Conroy, J., & Smith, D. M. (1993). Following the course of change: A study of adaptive and maladaptive behaviors in young adults living in the community: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 28(2) Jun 1993, 149-154.
  • Rosenbaum, P. L., Armstrong, R. W., & King, S. M. (1986). Improving attitudes toward the disabled: A randomized controlled trial of direct contact versus Kids-on-the-Block: Journal of Developmental & Behavioral Pediatrics Vol 7(5) Oct 1986, 302-307.
  • Rousey, A. B., Blacher, J. B., & Hanneman, R. A. (1990). Predictors of out-of-home placement of children with severe handicaps: A cross-sectional analysis: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 94(5) Mar 1990, 522-531.
  • Rowe, J. A., & Rapp, D. L. (1980). Tantrums: Remediation through communication: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 6(4) Jul-Aug 1980, 197-208.
  • Rowland, C. (1990). Communication in the classroom for children with dual sensory impairments: Studies of teacher and child behavior: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 6(4) Dec 1990, 262-274.
  • Rowland, C., & Schweigert, P. (1989). Tangible symbols: Symbolic communication for individuals with multisensory impairments: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 5(4) Dec 1989, 226-234.
  • Rowland, C., & Schweigert, P. (2000). Tangible symbols, tangible outcomes: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 16(2) Jun 2000, 61-78.
  • Rubin, J., & Klineman, J. (1974). They opened our eyes: The story of an exploratory art program for visually-impaired multiply-handicapped children: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 6(4) Dec 1974, 106-113.
  • Rubin, J. A. (1975). Through art to affect: Blind children express their feelings: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 69(9) Nov 1975, 385-391.
  • Rudnitzki, G. (1988). Group Therapy with Disabled Young People: Effects of Modified Group-Analytic Techniques: Group Analysis Vol 21(2) Jun 1988, 169-178.
  • Rupprecht, W. (1984). Early intervention from a parent's viewpoint: Fruhforderung interdisziplinar Vol 3(4) 1984, 177-183.
  • Ryan, D., McGregor, F., Akermanis, M., Southwell, K., Ramke, M., & Woodyatt, G. (2004). Facilitating communication in children with multiple disabilities: Three case studies of girls with Rett syndrome: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 26(21-22) Nov 2004, 1268-1277.
  • Sacks, S. Z., Barrett, S. S., & Orlansky, M. D. (1997). People with multiple disabilities. New York, NY: American Foundation for the Blind.
  • Safford, P. L., Gregg, L. A., Schneider, G., & Sewell, J. M. (1976). A stimulation program for young sensory-impaired, multihandicapped children: Education & Training of the Mentally Retarded Vol 11(1) Feb 1976, 12-17.
  • Sakaguchi, S. (1994). Attempt at communication guidance for complex severe handicaps--physical handicaps and mental retardation: Application of INREAL analysis to guidance for multiple handicaps: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 31(5) Mar 1994, 55-61.
  • Salisbury, C., & Evans, I. M. (1988). Comparison of parental involvement in regular and special education: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 13(4) Win 1988, 268-272.
  • Sandler, A. G., & McLain, S. C. (1987). Sensory reinforcement: Effects of response-contingent vestibular stimulation on multiply handicapped children: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 91(4) Jan 1987, 373-378.
  • Sasso, G. M., Hughes, G. G., Swanson, H. L., & Novak, C. G. (1987). A comparison of peer initiation interventions in promoting multiple peer initiators: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 22(3) Sep 1987, 150-155.
  • Sato, S. (2000). Motor skill training: Setting goals for children with cerebral palsy: Japanese Journal of Special Education Vol 38(1) Jun 2000, 41-51.
  • Saunders, M. D., Questad, K. A., Kedziorski, T. L., Boase, B. C., Patterson, E. A., & Cullinan, T. R. (2001). Unprompted mechanical switch use in individuals with severe multiple disabilities: An evaluation of the effects of body position: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 13(1) Mar 2001, 27-39.
  • Saunders, M. D., Smagner, J. P., & Saunders, R. R. (2003). Improving Methodological and Technological Analyses of Adaptive Switch Use of Individuals with Profound Multiple Impairments: Behavioral Interventions Vol 18(4) Nov 2003, 227-243.
  • Saunders, M. D., Timler, G. R., Cullinan, T. B., Pilkey, S., Questad, K. A., & Saunders, R. R. (2003). Evidence of contingency awareness in people with profound multiple impairments: Response duration versus response rate indicators: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 24(4) Jul-Aug 2003, 231 -245.
  • Saunders, R. R., Saunders, M. D., Struve, B., Munce, A. L., Olswang, L. B., Dowden, P. A., et al. (2007). Discovering indices of contingency awareness in adults with multiple profound disabilities: American Journal on Mental Retardation Vol 112(4) Jul 2007, 246-260.
  • Savaria, F., & Blanchette, F. (1986). Work integration project for mentally retarded and multihandicapped adults: Revue de Modification du Comportement Vol 16(2) Sum 1986, 77-83.
  • Scelles, R., Avant, M., Houssier, F., Maraquin, C., & Marty, F. (2005). Adolescence and polyhandicap: Views across the advenance of the subject: Neuropsychiatrie de l'Enfance et de l'Adolescence Vol 53(6) Oct 2005, 290-298.
  • Schanel-Klitsch, E., Ciner, E. B., Graboyes, M., & Appel, S. (1999). Visual evaluation of the multiply impaired: The success of the interdisciplinary team approach: RE:view Vol 31(1) Spr 1999, 9-16.
  • Schepis, M. M., & Reid, D. H. (1995). Effects of a voice output communication aid on interactions between support personnel and an individual with multiple disabilities: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 28(1) Spr 1995, 73-77.
  • Schiefelbusch, R. L. (1984). Speech, language and communication disorders of the multiple handicapped: Folia Phoniatrica Vol 36(1) Jan-Feb 1984, 8-23.
  • Schleien, S. J. (1991). Severe multiple disabilities. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc.
  • Schloss, P. J., Smith, M. A., Goldsmith, L., & Selinger, J. (1984). Identifying current and relevant curricular sequences for multiply involved hearing-impaired learners: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 129(4) Sep 1984, 370-374.
  • Schneider, N. (1986). Treatment and group therapy with dually diagnosed populations: Journal for Specialists in Group Work Vol 11(3) Sep 1986, 151-156.
  • Schoen, S. F. (1986). Decreasing noncompliance in a severely multihandicapped child: Psychology in the Schools Vol 23(1) Jan 1986, 88-94.
  • Schoen, S. F., & Thomas, R. (2006). Altering the inappropriate comments of a student with multiple disabilities: Journal of Instructional Psychology Vol 33(1) Mar 2006, 75-79.
  • Schum, R. (2004). Psychological Assessment of Children with Multiple Handicaps Who Have Hearing Loss: Volta Review Vol 104(4) 2004, 237-255.
  • Schwartzman, J. S. (2003). Rett syndrome: Revista Brasileira de Psiquiatria Vol 25(2) Jun 2003, 110-113.
  • Schweigert, P. (1989). Use of microswitch technology to facilitate social contingency awareness as a basis for early communication skills: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 5(3) Sep 1989, 192-198.
  • Schweigert, P., & Rowland, C. (1992). Early communication and microtechnology: Instructional sequence and case studies of children with severe multiple disabilities: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 8(4) Dec 1992, 273-286.
  • Search, D. L. (1974). A special short-term evaluation/training program for deaf-blind adults: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 68(10) Dec 1974, 444-446.
  • Sebba, J. (1988). Profound and multiple handicaps: Monitoring clients and their parents: Irish Journal of Psychology Vol 9(2) 1988, 286-308.
  • Seitz, S., & Marcus, S. (1976). Mother-child interactions: A foundation for language development: Exceptional Children Vol 42(8) May 1976, 445-449.
  • Selinske, J. E., Greer, R. D., & Lodhi, S. (1991). A functional analysis of the comprehensive application of behavior analysis to schooling: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 24(1) Spr 1991, 107-117.
  • Serber, S. L., Kumar, R., Woo, M. A., Macey, P. M., Fonarow, G. C., & Harper, R. M. (2008). Cognitive test performance and brain pathology: Nursing Research Vol 57(2) Mar-Apr 2008, 75-85.
  • Shapiro, E. S., Browder, D. M., & D'Huyvetters, K. K. (1984). Increasing academic productivity of severely multi-handicapped children with self-management: Idiosyncratic effects: Analysis & Intervention in Developmental Disabilities Vol 4(2) 1984, 171-188.
  • Shapiro, L. P., Gordon, R., & Neiditch, C. (1977). Documenting change in young multiply handicapped children in a rehabilitation center: The Journal of Special Education Vol 11(2) Sum 1977, 243-257.
  • Sharpe, P. (1990). An assessment of the cognitive abilities of multiply handicapped children: Adaptations of the Uzgiris and Hunt scales and their use with children in Britain and Singapore: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 16(6) Nov-Dec 1990, 335-353.
  • Shea, M. P., Salhani, D. P., Lewko, J. H., Boschen, K. A., & et al. (1993). Integrated Services for Northern Children: A network out-reach program for children with multiple service needs: Canadian Journal of Rehabilitation Vol 6(4) Sum 1993, 230-237.
  • Shearer, M. S., & Shearer, D. E. (1972). The Portage Project: A model for early childhood education: Exceptional Children Vol 39(3) Nov 1972, 210-217.
  • Shepard, C. H. (1976). Teaching language to mentally retarded deaf children: A review of the literature and a description of one classroom program: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 121(4) Aug 1976, 366-369.
  • Sigafoos, J., Penned, D., & Versluis, J. (1996). Naturalistic assessment leading to effective treatment of self-injury in a young boy with multiple disabilities: Education & Treatment of Children Vol 19(2) May 1996, 101-123.
  • Sigafoos, J., & Reichle, J. (1992). Comparing explicit to generalized requesting in an augmentative communication mode: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 1992, 167-188.
  • Sigafoos, J., Roberts, D., Couzens, D., & Kerr, M. (1993). Providing opportunities for choice-making and turn-taking to adults with multiple disabilities: Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities Vol 5(4) Dec 1993, 297-310.
  • Sigafoos, J., & Souzens, D. (1995). Teaching functional use of an eye gaze communication board to a child with multiple disabilities: British Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 41(81, Pt 2) Jul 1995, 114-125.
  • Silva, D. A., Friedlander, B. Z., & Knight, M. S. (1978). Multihandicapped children's preferences for pure tones and speech stimuli as a method of assessing auditory capabilities: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 83(1) Jul 1978, 29-36.
  • Silverstein, L., Krasner, P. R., & Governale, R. (1982). Sensory feedback training to enable "blind hands to see": A pilot program with cerebral palsy children: American Journal of Clinical Biofeedback Vol 5(2) Fal-Win 1982, 131-137.
  • Silverstein, R. (1986). The legal necessity for residential schools serving deaf, blind, and multi-handicapped sensory-impaired children: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 131(2) Apr 1986, 78-84.
  • Sims, M., & Bridgman, G. (1984). Evaluation of progress using the context input process and product model: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 10(6) Nov-Dec 1984, 359-379.
  • Sinason, V. (1986). Secondary mental handicap and its relationship to trauma: Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy Vol 2(2) 1986, 131-154.
  • Sinason, V. (1988). Richard III, Hephaestus and Echo: Sexuality and mental/multiple handicap: Journal of Child Psychotherapy Vol 14(2) 1988, 93-105.
  • Sinason, V. (1999). The psychotherapeutic needs of the learning disabled and multiply disabled child. Florence, KY: Taylor & Frances/Routledge.
  • Singh, N. N., Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Molina, E. J., Adkins, A. D., & Oliva, D. (2003). Self-Determination During Mealtimes Through Microswitch Choice-Making by an Individual with Complex Multiple Disabilities and Profound Mental Retardation: Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions Vol 5(4) Fal 2003, 209-215.
  • Singh, N. N., Lancioni, G. E., Winton, A. S. W., Wahler, R. G., Singh, J., & Sage, M. (2004). Mindful caregiving increases happiness among individuals with profound multiple disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 25(2) Mar-Apr 2004, 207-218.
  • Sinkkonen, J. (1994). Evaluation of mental health problems among Finnish hearing impaired children: Psychiatria Fennica Vol 25 1994, 52-65.
  • Sirotkin, S. A. (1979). The transition from gesture to word: Soviet Psychology Vol 17(3) Spr 1979, 46-59.
  • Sisson, L. A. (1992). Positive behavioral support: New foci in the management of challenging behaviors: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 86(8) Oct 1992, 364-369.
  • Sisson, L. A., Babeo, T. J., & Van Hasselt, V. B. (1988). Group training to increase social behaviors in young multihandicapped children: Behavior Modification Vol 12(4) Oct 1988, 497-524.
  • Sisson, L. A., & Dixon, M. J. (1990). Multiply disabled children. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, Inc.
  • Sisson, L. A., Kilwein, M. L., & Van Hasselt, V. B. (1988). A graduated guidance procedure for teaching self-dressing skills to multihandicapped children: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 9(4) 1988, 419-432.
  • Sisson, L. A., Van Hasselt, V. B., Hersen, M., & Aurand, J. C. (1988). Tripartite behavioral intervention to reduce stereotypic and disruptive behaviors in young multihandicapped children: Behavior Therapy Vol 19(4) Fal 1988, 503-526.
  • Sisson, L. A., Van Hasselt, V. B., Hersen, M., & Strain, P. S. (1985). Peer interventions: Increasing social behaviors in multihandicapped children: Behavior Modification Vol 9(3) Jul 1985, 293-321.
  • Smeets, P. M., & Striefel, S. (1975). The effects of different reinforcement conditions on the test performance of multihandicapped deaf children: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 8(1) Spr 1975, 83-89.
  • Smith, P. D., Gast, D. L., Logan, K. R., & Jacobs, H. A. (2001). Customizing instruction to maximize functional outcomes for students with profound multiple disabilities: Exceptionality Vol 9(3) 2001, 135-145.
  • Smith, T. (1983). Guidelines for working/playing with deaf-blind people: Readings in Deafness Mono 9 1983, 101-112.
  • Smith, V. K., & Prelock, P. A. (2002). A case management model for school-age children with multiple needs: Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools Vol 33(2) Apr 2002, 124-129.
  • Snart, F., & Hillyard, A. (1985). Staff ratios and allocated instructional time for multihandicapped students: Exceptional Children Vol 51(4) Jan 1985, 289-296.
  • Sobsey, R. (1983). Comparison of feeding whole and pureed foods to a multihandicapped adolescent: A case study: Mental Retardation & Learning Disability Bulletin Vol 11(2) 1983, 85-91.
  • Solarova, S. (1976). Are there students with multi-handicaps in every special education class? : Vierteljahresschrift fur Heilpadagogik und ihre Nachbargebiete Vol 45(3) Sep 1976, 265-270.
  • Sontag, E., Smith, J., & Sailor, W. (1977). The severely/profoundly handicapped: Who are they? Where are they? : The Journal of Special Education Vol 11(1) Spr 1977, 5-11.
  • Soodak, L. C., & Erwin, E. J. (2000). Valued member or tolerated participant: Parents' experiences in inclusive early childhood settings: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 25(1) Spr 2000, 29-41.
  • Sowers, J.-A., & Powers, L. (1995). Enhancing the participation and independence of students with severe physical and multiple disabilities in performing community activities: Mental Retardation Vol 33(4) Aug 1995, 209-220.
  • Speigel-McGill, P., Bambara, L. M., Shores, R. E., & Fox, J. J. (1984). The effects of proximity on socially oriented behaviors of severely multiply handicapped children: Education & Treatment of Children Vol 7(4) Fal 1984, 365-378.
  • Spiegel, B. B., Benjamin, B. J., & Spiegel, S. A. (1993). One method to increase spontaneous use of an assistive communication device: Case study: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 9(2) Jun 1993, 111-118.
  • St. Lawrence, J. S., & Drabman, R. S. (1984). Suppression of chronic high frequency spitting in a multiply handicapped and mentally retarded adolescent: Child & Family Behavior Therapy Vol 6(1) Spr 1984, 45-55.
  • Staub, D., & Hunt, P. (1993). The effects of social interaction training on high school peer tutors of schoolmates with severe disabilities: Exceptional Children Vol 60(1) Sep 1993, 41-57.
  • Stedt, J. D., & Palermo, D. S. (1983). The morale of teachers of multihandicapped and nonhandicapped children in a residential school for the deaf: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 128(3) Jun 1983, 383-387.
  • Steege, M. W., Wacker, D. P., Berg, W. K., Cigrand, K. K., & et al. (1989). The use of behavioral assessment to prescribe and evaluate treatments for severely handicapped children: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 22(1) Spr 1989, 23-33.
  • Stephenson, J. (2006). Music Therapy and the Education of Students with Severe Disabilities: Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities Vol 41(3) Sep 2006, 290-299.
  • Straub, E. G. (1983). Independent living skills training for multihandicapped deaf adults: A residential approach: Readings in Deafness Mono 6 1983, 150-161.
  • Strawbridge, L. A., Drnach, M., Sisson, L. A., & Van Hasselt, V. B. (1989). Behavior therapy combined with physical therapy to promote walker use by a child with multiple handicaps: Education & Training in Mental Retardation Vol 24(3) Sep 1989, 239-247.
  • Sunder, T. R. (1997). Meeting the challenge of epilepsy in persons with multiple handicaps: Journal of Child Neurology Vol 12(Suppl 1) Nov 1997, S38-S43.
  • Syme, J., & Wilton, K. (1987). Perceptions of a community program for multiply handicapped blind young adults: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 81(2) Feb 1987, 59-60.
  • Tait, P. E., & Ward, M. (1987). When a student dies: Helping teachers who grieve: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 18(4) Win 1987, 151-156.
  • Tang, J.-C., Patterson, T. G., & Kennedy, C. H. (2003). Identifying specific sensory modalities maintaining the stereotypy of students with multiple profound disabilities: Research in Developmental Disabilities Vol 24(6) Nov-Dec 2003, 433-451.
  • Tarnowski, K. J., & Drabman, R. S. (1985). The effects of ambulation training on the self-stimulatory behavior of a multiply handicapped child: Behavior Therapy Vol 16(3) Jun 1985, 275-285.
  • Tawney, J. W., & Demchak, M. A. (1984). Severely retarded? Severely handicapped? Multiply handicapped? A definitional analysis: Topics in Early Childhood Special Education Vol 4(3) Fal 1984, 1-18.
  • Taylor, B., & Taylor, A. (1996). A wayfinding perspective in mental health: Generating a sense of community among people with multiple handicapping conditions: Psychiatric Rehabilitation Journal Vol 20(2) Oct 1996, 77-81.
  • Taylor, J. C., Ekdahl, M. M., Romanczyk, R. G., & Miller, M. L. (1994). Escape behavior in task situations: Task versus social antecedents: Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders Vol 24(3) Jun 1994, 331-344.
  • Taylor, J. C., McKelvey, J. L., & Sisson, L. A. (1993). Community-referenced leisure skill clusters for adolescents with multiple disabilities: Journal of Behavioral Education Vol 3(4) Dec 1993, 363-386.
  • Taylor, J. C., Sisson, L. A., McKelvey, J. L., & Trefelner, M. F. (1993). Situation specificity in attention-seeking problem behavior: A case study: Behavior Modification Vol 17(4) Oct 1993, 474-497.
  • Tedder, N. (1983). They're not all Helen Kellers: Readings in Deafness Mono 8 May 1983, 17-20.
  • Theunissen, G. (1986). The future of adults with severe mental and multiple disabilities: Behindertenpadagogik Vol 25(1) Feb 1986, 23-34.
  • Thoma, C. A., Rogan, P., & Baker, S. R. (2001). Student involvement in transition planning: Unheard voices: Education & Training in Mental Retardation & Developmental Disabilities Vol 36(1) Mar 2001, 16-29.
  • Thompson, R. J. (1977). Applied behavior analysis in the treatment of mealtime tantrums and delay in self feeding in a multi-handicapped child: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 6(3) Win 1977, 52-54.
  • Tillinghast, J. (1977). Developmental arts for exceptional children: Program report: Journal of Clinical Child Psychology Vol 6(3) Win 1977, 96-97.
  • Timokhin, V. V. (1988). International problems of caring for the hearing impaired children with primary disorders of intellectual or physical development: Defektologiya No 6 1988, 68-71.
  • Todis, B., & Singer, G. (1991). Stress and stress management in families with adopted children who have severe disabilities: Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps Vol 16(1) Spr 1991, 3-13.
  • Tomasik, M. (2007). Effective inclusion activities for high school students with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 657-659.
  • Tomkiewicz, S. (1975). Epidemiological survey: Parisian children with multiple handicaps or severely handicapped: Revue de Neuropsychiatrie Infantile et d'Hygiene Mentale de l'Enfance Vol 23(7) Jul 1975, 389-403.
  • Tomkiewicz, S., Biny, Y., & Zucman, E. (1971). Specialized family placement for severely retarded children: Analysis of four years of activity: Revue de Neuropsychiatrie Infantile et d'Hygiene Mentale de l'Enfance Vol 19(3-4) Mar 1971, 165-175.
  • Tota, A., Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., & Oliva, D. (2006). Evaluating the applicability of optic microswitches for eyelid responses in students with profound multiple disabilities: Disability and Rehabilitation: Assistive Technology Vol 1(4) Sep 2006, 217-223.
  • Towfighy-Hooshyar, N., & Zingle, H. W. (1984). Regular-class students' attitudes toward integrated multiply handicapped peers: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 88(6) May 1984, 630-637.
  • Townsend, A., Wyke, S., & Hunt, K. (2006). Self-managing and managing self: Practical and moral dilemmas in accounts of living with chronic illness: Chronic Illness Vol 2(3) Sep 2006, 185-194.
  • Trefler, E., Nickey, J., & Hobson, D. A. (1983). Technology in the education of multiply-handicapped children: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 37(6) Jun 1983, 381-387.
  • Tretakoff, M. I. (1977). The evolution of programs for blind mentally retarded children in residential facilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 71(1) Jan 1977, 29-33.
  • Trief, E. (2007). The use of tangible cues for children with multiple disabilities and visual impairment: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 613-619.
  • Trief, E., De Lisi, L., Cravello, R., & Yu, Z. (2007). A profile of orientation and mobility instruction with a student with multiple disabilities: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 101(10) Oct 2007, 620-625.
  • Troster, H., Brambring, M., & Van der Burg, J. (1995). Sleep disorders in visually impaired infants and preschoolers: Praxis der Kinderpsychologie und Kinderpsychiatrie Vol 44(2) Feb 1995, 36-44.
  • Tucker, D. J., & Berry, G. W. (1980). Teaching severely multihandicapped students to put on their own hearing aids: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 13(1) Spr 1980, 65-75.
  • Tucker, M., Sigafoos, J., & Bushell, H. (1998). Analysis of conditions associated with low rates of challenging behaviour in two adolescents with multiple disabilities: Behaviour Change Vol 15(2) 1998, 126-139.
  • Tucker, P. J., & Kretschmer, R. R. (1999). How adult beliefs shape the speech communities of a child who has multiple disabilities: Mental Retardation Vol 37(5) Oct 1999, 395-406.
  • Tweedie, D. (1974). Behavioral change in a deaf-blind multihandicapped child: Volta Review Vol 76(4) Apr 1974, 213-218.
  • Tweedie, D. (1974). Demonstrating behavioral change of deaf-blind children: Exceptional Children Vol 40(7) Apr 1974, 510-512.
  • Tweedie, D. (1974). Observing the communication behavior of deaf-blind children: American Annals of the Deaf Vol 119(3) Jun 1974, 342-347.
  • Tweedie, D. (1975). Videoaudiometry: A possible procedure for "difficult-to-test" populations: Volta Review Vol 77(2) Feb 1975, 129-134.
  • Tweedle, D. (1975). Identification and documentation of audio-behavioral responses in a deaf-blind multihandicapped population through the use of videotape: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 7(4) Dec 1975, 108-111.
  • Tynan, W. D., Asp, K. S., Serper, L., & Emory, E. K. (1985). Student volunteer social support and infant intervention: A case study: Infant Mental Health Journal Vol 6(4) Win 1985, 204-209.
  • Udvari-Solner, A. (1996). Theoretical influences on the establishment of inclusive practices: Cambridge Journal of Education Vol 26(1) 1996, 101-119.
  • Uslan, M. M., Malone, S., & de l'Aune, W. (1983). Teaching route travel to multiply handicapped blind adults: An auditory approach: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 77(1) Jan 1983, 18-20.
  • Vacola, G. (1987). About young, multihandicapped individuals: Their affective and sexual life: Psychologie Medicale Vol 19(6) Apr 1987, 895-897.
  • Vacola, G. (1987). A language for deaf psychotics and their family: Annales Medico-Psychologiques Vol 145(4) Apr 1987, 372-378.
  • Valcante, G., Roberson, W., Reid, W. R., & Wolking, W. D. (1989). Effects of wait-time and intertrial interval durations on learning by children with multiple handicaps: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 22(1) Spr 1989, 43-55.
  • van Baar, A. L., van Wassenaer, A. G., Briet, J. M., Dekker, F. W., & Kok, J. H. (2005). Very Preterm Birth is Associated with Disabilities in Multiple Developmental Domains: Journal of Pediatric Psychology Vol 30(3) Apr 2005, 247-255.
  • van den Broek, E. G. C., Janssen, C. G. C., van Ramshorst, T., & Deen, L. (2006). Visual impairments in people with severe and profound multiple disabilities: An inventory of visual functioning: Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 50(6) Jun 2006, 470-475.
  • Van den Pol, R. A., & et al. (1981). Teaching the handicapped to eat in public places: Acquisition, generalization, and maintenance of restaurant skills: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 14(1) Spr 1981, 61-69.
  • van der Putten, A., Reynders, K., Vlaskamp, C., & Nakken, H. (2004). A Functionally Focused Curriculum for Children with Profound Multiple Disabilities: A Goal Analysis: Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 17(2) Jun 2004, 71-75.
  • Van der Putten, A., Vlaskamp, C., Reynders, K., & Nakken, H. (2005). Children with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: The effects of functional movement activities: Clinical Rehabilitation Vol 19(6) Sep 2005, 613-620.
  • Van der Putten, A., Vlaskamp, C., Reynders, K., & Nakken, H. (2005). Movement skill assessment in children with profound multiple disabilities: A psychometric analysis of the Top Down Motor Milestone Test: Clinical Rehabilitation Vol 19(6) Sep 2005, 635-643.
  • Van Dijk, J. (1990). The Sint-Michielsgestel approach to diagnosis and education of multisensory impaired persons: Defektologiya No 1 1990, 67-75.
  • Van Hasselt, V. B., Sisson, L. A., & Aach, S. R. (1987). Parent training to increase compliance in a young multihandicapped child: Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry Vol 18(3) Sep 1987, 275-283.
  • Van Houten, R., & Rolider, A. (1988). Recreating the scene: An effective way to provide delayed punishment for inappropriate motor behavior: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 21(2) Sum 1988, 187-192.
  • Varas Martin, F. J. (1988). Psychopedagogy and group intervention: Clinica y Analisis Grupal Vol 10(2)[48] May-Aug 1988, 261-279.
  • Vaz, I. (1995). Personal health record for school children with multiple needs: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 21(3) May 1995, 191-198.
  • Vernon, M., Bair, R., & Lotz, S. (1979). Psychological evaluation and testing of children who are deaf-blind: School Psychology Review Vol 8(3) Sum 1979, 291-295.
  • Visser, H. M., Dekker, J., Hartevelt-Bosma, L., Rijnierse, P., & De Jonghe, F. (2006). Intakes for (day) clinical psychotherapy. A cohort study: Tijdschrift voor Psychiatrie Vol 48(2) 2006, 141-145.
  • Vlaskamp, C. (1993). Development and evaluation of individual educational care programs for profoundly multiple handicapped persons: Issues in Special Education & Rehabilitation Vol 8(1) 1993, 45-50.
  • Vlaskamp, C., & Cuppen-Fonteine, H. (2007). Reliability of assessing the sensory perception of children with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: A case study: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 33(5) Sep 2007, 547-551.
  • Vlaskamp, C., de Geeter, K. I., Huijsmans, L. M., & Smit, I. H. (2003). Passive Activities: the Effectiveness of Multisensory Environments on the Level of Activity of Individuals with Profound Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 16(2) Jun 2003, 135-143.
  • Vlaskamp, C., Hiemstra, S. J., & Wiersma, L. A. (2007). Becoming aware of what you know or need to know: Gathering client and context characteristics in day services for persons with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 97-103.
  • Vlaskamp, C., Hiemstra, S. J., Wiersma, L. A., & Zijlstra, B. J. H. (2007). Extent, duration, and content of day services' activities for persons with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 4(2) Jun 2007, 152-159.
  • Vlaskamp, C., & Nakken, H. (1999). Missing in execution: Therapies and activities for individuals with profound multiple disabilities: British Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 45(89, Pt 2) Jul 1999, 99-109.
  • Voelker, S., Shore, D., Hakim-Larson, J., & Bruner, D. (1997). Discrepancies in parent and teacher ratings of adaptive behavior of children with multiple disabilities: Mental Retardation Vol 35(1) Feb 1997, 10-17.
  • von Wendt, L., & et al. (1985). Cerebral palsy and additional handicaps in a 1-year birth cohort from northern Finland: A prospective follow-up study to the age of 14 years: Annals of Clinical Research Vol 17(4) 1985, 156-161.
  • Wacker, D. P., & et al. (1985). Evaluation of reinforcer preferences for profoundly handicapped students: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 18(2) Sum 1985, 173-178.
  • Wacker, D. P., Harper, D. C., Powell, W. J., & Healy, A. (1983). Life outcomes and satisfaction ratings of multihandicapped adults: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 25(5) Oct 1983, 625-631.
  • Wacker, D. P., Wiggins, B., Fowler, M., & Berg, W. K. (1988). Training students with profound or multiple handicaps to make requests via microswitches: Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis Vol 21(4) Win 1988, 331-343.
  • Wakefield, D. (2005). Profound and Multiple Learning Difficulties: Educational Psychology in Practice Vol 21(4) Dec 2005, 353-354.
  • Wanke-Greiner, K. (2005). Relationship work using songs. Aspects of developmental psychology in singing with multiple disordered adults: Musiktherapeutische Umschau Vol 26(2) 2005, 130-139.
  • Ward, J. L. (1981). A program for dependent handicapped students within the Calgary Catholic School Board: Mental Retardation Bulletin Vol 9(2-3) 1981, 97-111.
  • Watkins, L. T., Sprafkin, J. N., & Krolikowski, D. M. (1993). Using videotaped lessons to facilitate the development of manual sign skills in students with mental retardation: AAC: Augmentative and Alternative Communication Vol 9(3) Sep 1993, 177-183.
  • Wehmeyer, M. L. (2005). Self-determination and individuals with severe disabilities: Re-examining meanings and misinterpretations: Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities Vol 30(3) Fal 2005, 113-120.
  • Welsh, R. L. (1985). Summer program of the Maryland School for the Blind: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 79(7) Sep 1985, 318.
  • Wheeler, J. J., Carter, S. L., Mayton, M. R., & Thomas, R. A. (2002). Structural analysis of instructional variables and their effects on task-engagement and self-aggression: Education & Training in Mental Retardation & Developmental Disabilities Vol 37(4) Dec 2002, 391-398.
  • Whelan, E. M., & Kretschmer, R. E. (1996). Hearing-impaired students with multiple disabilities as people who think, communicate, and feel: Volta Review Vol 98(5) Nov 1996, 221-232.
  • Wiebel, I., & Spies, F. (1983). Panel 6: Early intervention with children with multiple and/or massive disabilities: Fruhforderung interdisziplinar Vol 2(3) Jul-Sep 1983, 122-124.
  • Wilder, J., Axelsson, C., & Granlund, M. (2004). Parent-child interaction: A comparison of parents' perceptions in three groups: Disability and Rehabilitation: An International, Multidisciplinary Journal Vol 26(21-22) Nov 2004, 1313-1322.
  • Wilder, J., & Granlund, M. (2003). Behaviour style and interaction between seven children with multiple disabilities and their caregivers: Child: Care, Health and Development Vol 29(6) Nov 2003, 559-567.
  • William, J., Rickert, V., Hogan, J., Zolten, A. J., & et al. (1995). Children's Color Trails: Archives of Clinical Neuropsychology Vol 10(3) May-Jun 1995, 211-223.
  • Williams, J. K. (1990). Consumer skills for multiply handicapped students with low vision: RE:view Vol 21(4) Win 1990, 234-235.
  • Williams, T. (1985). The Mary Sheridan Unit: An evaluation of the effects of a hospital unit on the development of visually-impaired multiply handicapped children: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 11(1) Jan-Feb 1985, 1-12.
  • Wilson, D. A. (1974). Teaching multiply handicapped blind persons in a state hospital: New Outlook for the Blind Vol 68(8) Oct 1974, 337-343.
  • Wilson, P. G., Cuvo, A. J., & Davis, P. K. (1986). Training a functional skill cluster: Nutritious meal planning within a budget, grocery list writing, and shopping: Analysis & Intervention in Developmental Disabilities Vol 6(3) 1986, 179-201.
  • Winnett, R. L. (1989). Long-term care reconsidered: The role of the psychologist in the geriatric rehabilitation milieu: Journal of Applied Gerontology Vol 8(1) Mar 1989, 53-68.
  • Wittenstein, S. H. (1993). A parent-professional collaboration model of transitional planning: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 87(6) Jun 1993, 227-229.
  • Woods, G. E. (1979). Visual problems in the handicapped child: Child Care, Health & Development Vol 5(5) Sep-Oct 1979, 303-322.
  • Woods, R. W., & Lindsey, J. D. (1994). Perceived and actual mathematical competencies of children with visual impairments and learning disabilities: Psychological Reports Vol 74(1) Feb 1994, 238.
  • Wouters, H., Fonteyne, A., Lagae, L., & Stiers, P. (2006). Specific memory impairment in a multiple disabled male with fragile X syndrome and temporal lobe epilepsy: Developmental Medicine & Child Neurology Vol 48(5) May 2006, 378-382.
  • Yarnall, G. D. (1983). Comparison of operant and conventional audiometric procedures with multihandicapped (deaf-blind) children: Volta Review Vol 85(2) Feb-Mar 1983, 69-82.
  • Young, K. R., West, R. P., Howard, V. F., & Whitney, R. (1986). Acquisition, fluency training, generalization, and maintenance of dressing skills of two developmentally disabled children: Education & Treatment of Children Vol 9(1) Feb 1986, 16-29.
  • Yuker, H. E. (1988). Perceptions of severely and multiply disabled persons: Journal of the Multihandicapped Person Vol 1(1) Mar 1988, 5-16.
  • Zalsman, G., & Cohen, D. J. (1998). Multiplex developmental disorder: Israel Journal of Psychiatry and Related Sciences Vol 35(4) 1998, 300-306.
  • Zanier, D. J., McPhail, P. J., & Voelker, S. L. (1989). A microcomputer-aided mobility training program for the multiply handicapped: Mental Retardation & Learning Disability Bulletin Vol 17(1) 1989, 51-62.
  • Ziev, J. D., Johnson, P. I., & Schein, J. D. (1989). An empirical demonstration of the case-management approach to rehabilitation of multiply sensorially disabled clients: Journal of the American Deafness and Rehabilitation Association Vol 22(4) Apr 1989, 86-93.
  • Zijlstra, H. P., & Vlaskamp, C. (2005). The Impact of Medical Conditions on the Support of Children with Profound Intellectual and Multiple Disabilities: Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual Disabilities Vol 18(2) Jun 2005, 151-161.
  • Zijlstra, H. P., & Vlaskamp, C. (2005). Leisure provision for persons with profound intellectual and multiple disabilities: Quality time or killing time? : Journal of Intellectual Disability Research Vol 49(6) Jun 2005, 434-448.

Single case studies

  • Adams, C. D., & Drabman, R. S. (1995). Improving morning interactions: Beat-the-Buzzer with a boy having multiple handicaps: Child & Family Behavior Therapy Vol 17(3) 1995, 13-26.
  • Adams, W. (1980). Treatment of assaultive hair pulling in a multihandicapped youth: Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders Vol 10(3) Sep 1980, 335-342.
  • Akuffo, E., MacSweeney, D. A., & Gajwani, A. K. (1986). Multiple pathology in a mentally handicapped individual: British Journal of Psychiatry Vol 149 Sep 1986, 377-378.
  • Alberto, P. A., Troutman, A. A., & Briggs, T. (1983). The use of negative reinforcement to condition a response in a deaf-blind student: Education of the Visually Handicapped Vol 15(2) Sum 1983, 43-50.
  • Antonucci, M., Lancioni, G. E., O'Reilly, M. F., Singh, N. N., Sigafoos, J., & Oliva, D. (2006). Enabling a Man With Multiple Disabilities and Limited Motor Behavior to Perform a Functional Task With Help of Microswitch Technology: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 103(1) Aug 2006, 83-88.
  • Antonucci, M., Lancioni, G. E., Singh, N. N., O'Reilly, M. F., Sigafoos, J., Oliva, D., et al. (2006). A Writing Program with Word Prediction for a Young Man with Multiple Disabilities: A Preliminary Assessment: Perceptual and Motor Skills Vol 103(1) Aug 2006, 223-228.
  • Bailey, D. M., & DeFelice, T. (1991). Evaluating movement for switch use in an adult with severe physical and cognitive impairments: American Journal of Occupational Therapy Vol 45(1) Jan 1991, 76-79.
  • Baum, N. T. (1981). A multi-focal approach in the assessment and treatment of multi-handicapped adolescents: An individual case study: Dissertation Abstracts International.
  • Bowden, J., & Thorburn, J. (1993). Including a student with multiple disabilities and visual impairment in her neighborhood school: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 87(7) Sep 1993, 268-272.
  • Chan, J. B., & May, D. T. (1999). The impact of leisure options on the frequency and spontaneous communication production of a young child with multiple disabilities: British Journal of Developmental Disabilities Vol 45(88, Pt 1) Jan 1999, 26-37.
  • Dunnett, J. (1997). Nielsen's little room: Its use with a young blind and physically disabled girl: Journal of Visual Impairment & Blindness Vol 91(2) Mar-Apr 1997, 145-150.
  • Facon, B. (1992). Promoting leisure activities in a child with multiple handicaps: Revue Francophone de la Deficience Intellectuelle Vol 3(1) Jun 1992, 49-57.
  • Falk, R. E., & et al. (1973). Partial trisomy of chromosome 11: A case report: American Journal of Mental Deficiency Vol 77(4) Jan 1973, 383-388.
  • Friedin, B. D., Borakove, L. S., & Fox, K. T. (1982). Treatment of an abnormal avoidance of fluid consumption: Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry Vol 13(1) Mar 1982, 85-87.


Dissertations

Because of the number of studies the dissertations in this area are listed on a seperate page Multiple disabilities - Dissertations